Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Analysis

323 missions · 177 completed

Missions

Open146Completed177All323
🏆Completed
Markov ChainOperations ResearchProbability+1·Captain: mikedeng1

Fundamentals of Queueing Theory III: The Transient M/M/1 Queue via Modified Bessel FunctionsTextbook

Motivation

Steady-state formulas describe a queue that has been running forever. Many practical questions are about a queue that has not: a call centre just after opening, a server just after a reset, a system under a burst of load. For these, the relevant quantity is the transient distribution pn(t)=Pr⁡{N(t)=n}p_n(t) = \Pr\{N(t) = n\}pn​(t)=Pr{N(t)=n} of the number N(t)N(t)N(t) in the system at a finite time ttt. It is also what determines how fast the steady state is approached, and it is needed for the busy period: the length of time a server stays busy once a customer arrives at an idle server.

For the single-server Markovian queue M/M/1 the transient distribution has an explicit closed form in modified Bessel functions. Its history is short and well documented. Ledermann and Reuter (1954) obtained it by spectral analysis of the birth–death process. Bailey (1954) found it by generating functions and Laplace transforms, and Champernowne (1956) by combinatorial methods. Bailey's route is the standard textbook derivation, and it is the one Gross, Shortle, Thompson and Harris outline in §2.11 of Fundamentals of Queueing Theory (4th ed., 2008). Abate and Whitt (1989) showed that computing with the resulting series is numerically delicate, which is one reason for having the formula pinned down exactly.

This mission formalizes §§2.11–2.12 of that book: the transient laws of M/M/1/1, M/M/1 and M/M/∞, and the M/M/1 busy period.

Setting

Customers arrive in a Poisson stream of rate λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0. Each service takes an exponential time of rate μ>0\mu > 0μ>0, and ρ=λ/μ\rho = \lambda/\muρ=λ/μ. The number in the system is a continuous-time Markov chain on {0,1,2,… }\{0, 1, 2, \dots\}{0,1,2,…}, and its state probabilities pn(t)p_n(t)pn​(t) satisfy the forward (differential–difference) equations. For M/M/1 started with N(0)=iN(0) = iN(0)=i they are, for t≥0t \ge 0t≥0,

pn′(t)=−(λ+μ)pn(t)+λpn−1(t)+μpn+1(t) (n>0),p0′(t)=−λp0(t)+μp1(t),(2.72)p_n'(t) = -(\lambda+\mu)p_n(t) + \lambda p_{n-1}(t) + \mu p_{n+1}(t)\ (n > 0), \qquad p_0'(t) = -\lambda p_0(t) + \mu p_1(t), \tag{2.72}pn′​(t)=−(λ+μ)pn​(t)+λpn−1​(t)+μpn+1​(t) (n>0),p0′​(t)=−λp0​(t)+μp1​(t),(2.72)

with pn(0)=1p_n(0) = 1pn​(0)=1 if n=in = in=i and 000 otherwise. The other systems are variants:

  • M/M/1/1, no waiting room: two states and equations (2.70).
  • M/M/∞, ample service: the death rate in state nnn is nμn\munμ, giving (2.76).
  • The busy-period system: (2.72) with 000 made absorbing (λ0=0\lambda_0 = 0λ0​=0) and N(0)=1N(0) = 1N(0)=1. Its p0(t)p_0(t)p0​(t) is the distribution function of the busy period TbpT_{bp}Tbp​.

A family (pn)(p_n)(pn​) solves a system on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞) when each pnp_npn​ has, at every t≥0t \ge 0t≥0, the prescribed derivative (a right derivative at t=0t = 0t=0). It is a probability solution when pn(t)≥0p_n(t) \ge 0pn​(t)≥0 and ∑npn(t)=1\sum_n p_n(t) = 1∑n​pn​(t)=1 for every t≥0t \ge 0t≥0. The modified Bessel function of the first kind is

In(y)=∑k=0∞(y/2)n+2kk! (n+k)!,I−n=In,I_n(y) = \sum_{k=0}^{\infty} \frac{(y/2)^{n+2k}}{k!\,(n+k)!}, \qquad I_{-n} = I_n,In​(y)=k=0∑∞​k!(n+k)!(y/2)n+2k​,I−n​=In​,

and the Laplace transform of fff is fˉ(s)=∫0∞e−stf(t) dt\bar f(s) = \int_0^\infty e^{-st} f(t)\,dtfˉ​(s)=∫0∞​e−stf(t)dt for Re⁡s>0\operatorname{Re} s > 0Res>0.

Formalization targets

Goal: the transient M/M/1 law, (2.75)

With y=2tλμy = 2t\sqrt{\lambda\mu}y=2tλμ​,

pn(t)=e−(λ+μ)t[ρ(n−i)/2In−i(y)+ρ(n−i−1)/2In+i+1(y)+(1−ρ)ρn∑j=n+i+2∞ρ−j/2Ij(y)].p_n(t) = e^{-(\lambda+\mu)t}\Big[\rho^{(n-i)/2} I_{n-i}(y) + \rho^{(n-i-1)/2} I_{n+i+1}(y) + (1-\rho)\rho^n \sum_{j=n+i+2}^{\infty} \rho^{-j/2} I_j(y)\Big].pn​(t)=e−(λ+μ)t[ρ(n−i)/2In−i​(y)+ρ(n−i−1)/2In+i+1​(y)+(1−ρ)ρnj=n+i+2∑∞​ρ−j/2Ij​(y)].

The goal asserts five things for every λ,μ>0\lambda, \mu > 0λ,μ>0 and every iii, with no restriction on ρ\rhoρ:

  1. the series converges;
  2. these functions solve (2.72);
  3. they meet the initial condition;
  4. they form a probability distribution at every ttt;
  5. they are the only probability solution.

Milestones

  1. (2.71): the M/M/1/1 solution p1(t)=λλ+μ(1−e−(λ+μ)t)+p1(0)e−(λ+μ)tp_1(t) = \frac{\lambda}{\lambda+\mu}(1-e^{-(\lambda+\mu)t}) + p_1(0)e^{-(\lambda+\mu)t}p1​(t)=λ+μλ​(1−e−(λ+μ)t)+p1​(0)e−(λ+μ)t, and the matching formula for p0p_0p0​.
  2. (2.74) and Rouché's theorem: for Re⁡s>0\operatorname{Re} s > 0Res>0, the quadratic (λ+μ+s)z−μ−λz2(\lambda+\mu+s)z - \mu - \lambda z^2(λ+μ+s)z−μ−λz2 has exactly one zero in ∣z∣<1|z| < 1∣z∣<1, namely z1=(λ+μ+s−(λ+μ+s)2−4λμ)/(2λ)z_1 = (\lambda+\mu+s-\sqrt{(\lambda+\mu+s)^2-4\lambda\mu})/(2\lambda)z1​=(λ+μ+s−(λ+μ+s)2−4λμ​)/(2λ).
  3. The transform of p0p_0p0​: pˉ0(s)=z1i+1/(μ(1−z1))\bar p_0(s) = z_1^{i+1}/(\mu(1-z_1))pˉ​0​(s)=z1i+1​/(μ(1−z1​)).
  4. The limit of (2.75): pn(t)→(1−ρ)ρnp_n(t) \to (1-\rho)\rho^npn​(t)→(1−ρ)ρn if ρ<1\rho < 1ρ<1, and pn(t)→0p_n(t) \to 0pn​(t)→0 if ρ≥1\rho \ge 1ρ≥1.
  5. (2.77), M/M/∞: started empty, pn(t)=a(t)ne−a(t)/n!p_n(t) = a(t)^n e^{-a(t)}/n!pn​(t)=a(t)ne−a(t)/n! with a(t)=(1−e−μt)λ/μa(t) = (1-e^{-\mu t})\lambda/\mua(t)=(1−e−μt)λ/μ. The statement says that this family solves (2.76), is the unique probability solution, and has generating function exp⁡((z−1)a(t))\exp((z-1)a(t))exp((z−1)a(t)).
  6. The busy-period transform: pˉ0(s)=2μ/(s[λ+μ+s+(λ+μ+s)2−4λμ])\bar p_0(s) = 2\mu/(s[\lambda+\mu+s+\sqrt{(\lambda+\mu+s)^2-4\lambda\mu}])pˉ​0​(s)=2μ/(s[λ+μ+s+(λ+μ+s)2−4λμ​]).
  7. The busy-period density: p0′(t)=μ/λ e−(λ+μ)tI1(2λμ t)/tp_0'(t) = \sqrt{\mu/\lambda}\,e^{-(\lambda+\mu)t} I_1(2\sqrt{\lambda\mu}\,t)/tp0′​(t)=μ/λ​e−(λ+μ)tI1​(2λμ​t)/t.
  8. (2.79): for λ<μ\lambda < \muλ<μ, E[Tbp]=1/(μ−λ)E[T_{bp}] = 1/(\mu-\lambda)E[Tbp​]=1/(μ−λ) and E[Tbc]=1/λ+1/(μ−λ)E[T_{bc}] = 1/\lambda + 1/(\mu-\lambda)E[Tbc​]=1/λ+1/(μ−λ).

Significance

The formula (2.75) is the exact finite-time law of the most basic queue. It gives the rate at which M/M/1 approaches equilibrium, and it gives the distribution of the queue under overload (ρ≥1\rho \ge 1ρ≥1), where no steady state exists. It is the reference against which numerical transient methods, such as the uniformization of Chapter 8 of the same book, are checked. The busy-period density and its mean (2.79) enter server-utilisation and vacation models, and the Laplace-transform method used here recurs in the M/G/1 analysis of Chapter 5.

All of these results are classical and proved in the literature. None of them is machine-checked, as far as the platform's catalogue and Mathlib show. The chain from a countable system of linear ODEs, through generating functions and a root-location argument, to a Bessel series is a standard pattern in applied probability, and a formal version of it is what this mission adds. The formal statements also make explicit what the book leaves implicit: the sense in which the equations hold at t=0t = 0t=0, and the class in which the solution is unique.

Difficulty

The forward equations (2.72) form an infinite linear system. The obvious approach is to treat it like a finite system of ODEs, whose solution is a matrix exponential, and read off (2.75). That fails for two reasons. The generator is an infinite matrix, so its exponential needs a functional-analytic setting. And uniqueness is not automatic for infinite systems: it needs a class, such as probability solutions, and an argument that works in that class.

The Bessel form is a second, independent difficulty. The transform pˉ0(s)\bar p_0(s)pˉ​0​(s) is fixed by a root-location argument in the complex plane. Inverting the transform, or verifying (2.75) directly, requires manipulating the three-term Bessel recurrence and exchanging infinite sums. The tail sum ∑jρ−j/2Ij\sum_{j} \rho^{-j/2} I_j∑j​ρ−j/2Ij​ has to be controlled uniformly enough to be differentiated term by term. For ρ≥1\rho \ge 1ρ≥1 the factor (1−ρ)(1-\rho)(1−ρ) is non-positive, so the nonnegativity of pn(t)p_n(t)pn​(t) is not visible from the formula.

Formalization scope

Conventions committed to:

  • Parameters. Rates are real with λ,μ>0\lambda, \mu > 0λ,μ>0, and ρ=λ/μ\rho = \lambda/\muρ=λ/μ. States are ℕ (Fin 2 for M/M/1/1).
  • Solutions. "Solves on [0,∞)[0,\infty)[0,∞)" is HasDerivWithinAt on Set.Ici 0 at every t≥0t \ge 0t≥0. Uniqueness is asserted among solutions that are probability distributions at every time.
  • Special functions. Half-integer powers of ρ\rhoρ are real powers, and I−m=ImI_{-m} = I_mI−m​=Im​ is part of the definition. Laplace transforms are complex Bochner integrals over (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞), and each statement also asserts the integrability it needs. Square roots with positive real part are hypotheses r2=(λ+μ+s)2−4λμr^2 = (\lambda+\mu+s)^2 - 4\lambda\mur2=(λ+μ+s)2−4λμ, Re⁡r>0\operatorname{Re} r > 0Rer>0.

The closed forms stated exactly as in the book are:

  • (2.71);
  • z1z_1z1​ and z2z_2z2​ of (2.74);
  • pˉ0(s)=z1i+1/(μ(1−z1))\bar p_0(s) = z_1^{i+1}/(\mu(1-z_1))pˉ​0​(s)=z1i+1​/(μ(1−z1​));
  • (2.75), with the Bessel series of p.101;
  • the M/M/∞ law and (2.77);
  • the busy-period transform and density of p.102;
  • (2.79).

The book derives (2.79) by a steady-state ratio argument valid for M/G/1. Here it is stated for M/M/1, as the mean of the explicit density.

A statement of (2.75) that only asserts the right-hand side is well defined, or checks only n=0n = 0n=0, is ruled out: the goal requires the ODE system, the initial condition, the probability property and uniqueness. For the same reason, the M/M/∞ law is tied to the system (2.76) and does not reduce to a Taylor expansion.

Needed infrastructure that Mathlib lacks:

  • modified Bessel functions of integer order;
  • Laplace transforms;
  • a Rouché-type zero count or a direct root-location lemma;
  • uniqueness for countable linear ODE systems with bounded or linearly growing rates.

The Bessel and Laplace definitions, and the uniqueness lemma for birth–death forward equations, are reusable beyond this mission. Contributions of those as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • D. Gross, J. F. Shortle, J. M. Thompson, C. M. Harris, Fundamentals of Queueing Theory, 4th ed., Wiley, 2008, §§2.11–2.12, pp.97–103. https://doi.org/10.1002/9781118625651
  • N. T. J. Bailey, "A continuous time treatment of a simple queue using generating functions", J. Royal Statistical Society B 16 (1954) 288–291. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.2517-6161.1954.tb00172.x
  • W. Ledermann, G. E. H. Reuter, "Spectral theory for the differential equations of simple birth and death processes", Phil. Trans. Royal Society A 246 (1954) 321–369. https://doi.org/10.1098/rsta.1954.0001
  • D. G. Champernowne, "An elementary method of solution of the queueing problem with a single server and constant parameters", J. Royal Statistical Society B 18 (1956) 125–128. https://doi.org/10.1111/j.2517-6161.1956.tb00217.x
  • J. Abate, W. Whitt, "Calculating time-dependent performance measures for the M/M/1 queue", IEEE Trans. Communications 37 (1989) 1102–1104. https://doi.org/10.1109/26.41165
15 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Convex OptimizationOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions II: Convex Functions Are Almost Differentiable and Their Almost-Gradients Are SubgradientsTextbook

Motivation

Gradient methods assume a continuous gradient; subgradient methods assume convexity. Many objective functions met in practice satisfy neither. Shor's example is economic planning, where components of the objective are piecewise-smooth, not necessarily convex functions of a parameter describing the productivity of a unit, and where minimax formulations produce kinks as a rule (Shor, Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions, Springer 1985, §1.4, p. 17, DOI 10.1007/978-3-642-82118-9). Such problems need a class of functions wide enough to contain piecewise-smooth and minimax functions and narrow enough to carry a usable replacement for the gradient.

Shor's answer is the class of almost differentiable functions, introduced in his 1972 work and presented in §1.4 of the book, together with the almost-gradient, a limit of gradients taken at nearby points of differentiability. The capstone of the section, Theorem 1.15, connects this class with convex analysis: every convex function on EnE_nEn​ is almost differentiable, and its almost-gradients are subgradients. This is what lets the later chapters treat convex minimization and almost-differentiable minimization with one set of tools. Clarke's generalized gradient of locally Lipschitz functions (Clarke 1975) is the closest relative; Shor's definition differs in requiring the gradient to be continuous on its domain (p. 19).

Setting

Let EnE_nEn​ denote nnn-dimensional Euclidean space with inner product (x,y)(x, y)(x,y) and norm ∥x∥\|x\|∥x∥. For f:En→Rf : E_n \to \mathbb{R}f:En​→R, write M={x∈En:f is differentiable at x}M = \{x \in E_n : f \text{ is differentiable at } x\}M={x∈En​:f is differentiable at x} and ∇f(x)\nabla f(x)∇f(x) for the gradient at x∈Mx \in Mx∈M.

A function fff is almost differentiable if

  1. on every bounded set SSS it is Lipschitz: ∣f(x)−f(y)∣≤LS∥x−y∥|f(x) - f(y)| \le L_S \|x - y\|∣f(x)−f(y)∣≤LS​∥x−y∥ for x,y∈Sx, y \in Sx,y∈S, with a constant LSL_SLS​ depending on SSS;
  2. it is differentiable at Lebesgue-almost every point of EnE_nEn​;
  3. the map x↦∇f(x)x \mapsto \nabla f(x)x↦∇f(x), restricted to MMM, is continuous.

An almost-gradient of fff at x0x_0x0​ is a vector ggg that is an accumulation point of a sequence ∇f(x1),∇f(x2),…\nabla f(x_1), \nabla f(x_2), \dots∇f(x1​),∇f(x2​),… with xk∈Mx_k \in Mxk​∈M and xk→x0x_k \to x_0xk​→x0​. The set of almost-gradients is G(x0)G(x_0)G(x0​). A generalized almost-gradient is a point of the closure of the convex hull of G(x0)G(x_0)G(x0​).

A vector ggg is a subgradient of fff at x0x_0x0​ if f(x)−f(x0)≥(g,x−x0)f(x) - f(x_0) \ge (g, x - x_0)f(x)−f(x0​)≥(g,x−x0​) for all x∈Enx \in E_nx∈En​; for convex fff the set of subgradients is the subdifferential Gf(x0)G_f(x_0)Gf​(x0​).

In Lean these objects are AlmostDifferentiable f, almostGradients f x₀ and IsSubgradient f x₀ g in the namespace ShorNonsmooth.AlmostDiff, with EnE_nEn​ = EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1.15 (p. 18)

For convex f:En→Rf : E_n \to \mathbb{R}f:En​→R,

f is almost differentiableandG(x0)⊆Gf(x0)  for every x0∈En.f \text{ is almost differentiable} \quad\text{and}\quad G(x_0) \subseteq G_f(x_0) \ \text{ for every } x_0 \in E_n .f is almost differentiableandG(x0​)⊆Gf​(x0​)  for every x0​∈En​.

The printed statement says the almost-gradients "coincide with" the subgradients. As a set equality this is false (for f(x)=∣x∣f(x) = |x|f(x)=∣x∣ on E1E_1E1​, G(0)={−1,1}G(0) = \{-1, 1\}G(0)={−1,1} while Gf(0)=[−1,1]G_f(0) = [-1, 1]Gf​(0)=[−1,1]), and the book's proof establishes the inclusion. The goal is the inclusion.

Milestones

  1. Proof of Theorem 1.15, display (p. 18). For convex fff differentiable at xkx_kxk​: f(x)−f(xk)≥(∇f(xk),x−xk)f(x) - f(x_k) \ge (\nabla f(x_k), x - x_k)f(x)−f(xk​)≥(∇f(xk​),x−xk​) for all xxx.
  2. Proof of Theorem 1.15 (p. 18). For convex fff and bounded SSS there is CCC with ∣fv′(x)∣≤C∥v∥|f'_v(x)| \le C\|v\|∣fv′​(x)∣≤C∥v∥ for all x∈Sx \in Sx∈S and all vvv, the one-sided directional derivatives existing.
  3. Proof of Theorem 1.15 (p. 18). A convex fff is differentiable almost everywhere and ∇f\nabla f∇f is continuous on MMM.
  4. Theorem 1.14 (p. 18). For almost differentiable fff, G(x)G(x)G(x) is nonempty, bounded and closed at every xxx.
  5. p. 19. For almost differentiable fff, conv⁡‾ G(x)\overline{\operatorname{conv}}\, G(x)convG(x) is convex, bounded and closed.

Significance

The result. Theorem 1.15 embeds convex functions into the almost differentiable class and identifies each almost-gradient of a convex function as a subgradient. Consequently any method that only needs almost-gradients (limits of gradients at nearby differentiable points, which is what a numerical procedure can actually compute) produces valid subgradients when applied to a convex function. Theorem 1.14 supplies the compactness that makes G(x)G(x)G(x) usable as a set-valued substitute for the gradient.

Formalizing it. All results here are classical and proved on paper. Mathlib contains Rademacher's theorem for Lipschitz functions (LipschitzWith.ae_differentiableAt) and local Lipschitz continuity of convex functions on open sets; it does not contain the continuity of the gradient of a convex function on its domain of differentiability, nor any notion of almost-gradient. The mission produces those, together with a formal record that the printed "coincide" is an inclusion. A formal proof of the true equality Gf(x0)=conv⁡‾ G(x0)G_f(x_0) = \overline{\operatorname{conv}}\, G(x_0)Gf​(x0​)=convG(x0​) would be a welcome further contribution.

Difficulty

Two parts of the goal carry real content. The first is condition (c): the gradient of a convex function, restricted to the set where it exists, is continuous. The book cites this from the literature; it is not a consequence of Rademacher's theorem, which gives differentiability almost everywhere and says nothing about how gradients at nearby points relate. The second is condition (b) in a form Lean accepts: Rademacher's theorem in Mathlib is stated for globally Lipschitz functions, while a convex function on EnE_nEn​ is only Lipschitz on bounded sets, so the almost-everywhere statement has to be assembled from local pieces. The passage from gradients to subgradients in the second conjunct is comparatively routine.

The analogous closure properties claimed on the same pages for sums, products and maxima of almost differentiable functions (Theorems 1.16 and 1.17) are false as printed and are not targets; see the formalization scope.

Formalization scope

  • EnE_nEn​ is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n); n=0n = 0n=0 is allowed and harmless. Functions are total and real-valued; convexity is ConvexOn ℝ Set.univ f.
  • The gradient is Mathlib's gradient f x; condition (c) is ContinuousOn (gradient f) {x | DifferentiableAt ℝ f x}, continuity of the restriction in the subspace topology.
  • Condition (a) is quantified over every bounded set with a set-dependent constant: ∀ S, Bornology.IsBounded S → ∃ L, LipschitzOnWith L f S. Condition (b) is ∀ᵐ x ∂volume, DifferentiableAt ℝ f x.
  • An almost-gradient is a cluster point (MapClusterPt) of the gradient sequence, not its limit; the points xkx_kxk​ may equal x0x_0x0​.
  • Subgradients are taken relative to the whole space, the domain of every function in this mission.
  • The goal states the inclusion G(x0)⊆Gf(x0)G(x_0) \subseteq G_f(x_0)G(x0​)⊆Gf​(x0​) proved in the book. Stating the printed set equality would make the goal false; weakening the first conjunct to "locally Lipschitz and differentiable almost everywhere" would drop condition (c) and with it the substance of the theorem. Neither is acceptable.
  • Theorem 1.16 (sums, differences, products) and Theorem 1.17 (maxima) are omitted: both are false for the class as defined. With h(x)=x2sin⁡(1/x)h(x) = x^2 \sin(1/x)h(x)=x2sin(1/x), the functions h+∣x∣h + |x|h+∣x∣ and −∣x∣-|x|−∣x∣ are almost differentiable but their sum hhh is differentiable everywhere with a derivative discontinuous at 000; and max⁡(h−∣x∣, h−∣x∣+2x)=h+x\max(h - |x|,\, h - |x| + 2x) = h + xmax(h−∣x∣,h−∣x∣+2x)=h+x. Theorem 1.18 (Mifflin's superposition theorem for semismooth functions) is cited from the literature without proof and rests on Clarke's generalized gradient; it is outside this mission.

Infrastructure that is reusable beyond this mission: continuity of the gradient of a convex function on its domain; Rademacher's theorem for locally Lipschitz functions on EnE_nEn​; the almost-gradient set and its compactness. Contributions that prove these as standalone lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • N. Z. Shor, Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions, Springer Series in Computational Mathematics 3, Springer, 1985. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-82118-9
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970, Theorem 25.5 (continuity of the gradient of a convex function). https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
  • F. H. Clarke, Generalized gradients and applications, Transactions of the American Mathematical Society 205 (1975), 247–262. https://doi.org/10.1090/S0002-9947-1975-0367131-6
  • H. Rademacher, Über partielle und totale Differenzierbarkeit von Funktionen mehrerer Variabeln und über die Transformation der Doppelintegrale, Mathematische Annalen 79 (1919), 340–359. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01498415
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Probability·Captain: mikedeng1

Stochastic Dynamic Programming and the Control of Queueing Systems XII: A Tauberian Theorem Linking Abel and Cesàro Means of Nonnegative SeriesTextbook

Motivation

In the theory of Markov decision chains two cost criteria dominate: the discounted cost, in which a cost incurred at time nnn is weighted by αn\alpha^nαn for a discount factor α∈(0,1)\alpha \in (0,1)α∈(0,1), and the average cost, the long-run cost per unit time. A standard route to average cost optimal policies is to solve the discounted problem and let α→1−\alpha \to 1^-α→1−. That route needs a precise link between the two criteria for a single sequence of expected costs u0,u1,u2,⋯≥0u_0, u_1, u_2, \dots \ge 0u0​,u1​,u2​,⋯≥0: the discounted cost multiplied by 1−α1-\alpha1−α on one side, the running average on the other. Appendix A.4 of Sennott, Stochastic Dynamic Programming and the Control of Queueing Systems (Wiley, 1999) supplies this link as Theorem A.4.2, and the book invokes it whenever it passes from discounted to average cost (for instance in Chapter 6, where it is applied to un=Eθ[C(Xn,An)]u_n = E_\theta[C(X_n, A_n)]un​=Eθ​[C(Xn​,An​)]).

The result belongs to classical summability theory.

  • Abelian direction. Convergence of averages implies convergence of the power-series (Abel) means: a consequence of Abel's and Frobenius's theorems on power series (19th century).
  • Tauber (1897). The first converse, under a growth condition on the terms.
  • Hardy and Littlewood (1914). The converse for Cesàro means of nonnegative terms, the "Hardy–Littlewood Tauberian theorem".
  • Karamata (1930). A short proof of that converse by polynomial approximation, reproduced in Titchmarsh, The Theory of Functions (1939, pp. 227–229). The book follows this proof.
  • Widder (1941). The continuous-time (Laplace transform) version.
  • Sennott (1986b). A proof of the discrete statement, cited by the book as its source for Theorem A.4.2.

Setting

Let u0,u1,u2,…u_0, u_1, u_2, \dotsu0​,u1​,u2​,… be nonnegative terms un∈[0,∞]u_n \in [0, \infty]un​∈[0,∞] with u0<∞u_0 < \inftyu0​<∞. For α∈[0,∞)\alpha \in [0, \infty)α∈[0,∞) the power series

U(α)=∑n=0∞αnun∈[0,∞]U(\alpha) = \sum_{n=0}^{\infty} \alpha^n u_n \in [0, \infty]U(α)=n=0∑∞​αnun​∈[0,∞]

always has a sum, possibly +∞+\infty+∞, because its partial sums increase. Its radius of convergence is R=(lim sup⁡nun1/n)−1∈[0,∞]R = (\limsup_{n} u_n^{1/n})^{-1} \in [0,\infty]R=(limsupn​un1/n​)−1∈[0,∞]. The partial sums are wn=∑k=0n−1ukw_n = \sum_{k=0}^{n-1} u_kwn​=∑k=0n−1​uk​ for n≥1n \ge 1n≥1. Two ways of averaging the sequence are compared:

  • the Cesàro means wn/nw_n / nwn​/n, as n→∞n \to \inftyn→∞;
  • the Abel means (1−α)U(α)(1-\alpha) U(\alpha)(1−α)U(α), as α→1−\alpha \to 1^-α→1− (from below).

For the constant sequence un≡Bu_n \equiv Bun​≡B both equal BBB. In the Lean development these are U, radius, w, cesaroMean and abelMean in the namespace SennottDP.Tauberian, all valued in ℝ≥0∞. The proof also uses the function rrr of Fig. A.1, equal to 000 on (0,e−1)(0, e^{-1})(0,e−1) and to 1/x1/x1/x on [e−1,1)[e^{-1}, 1)[e−1,1).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem A.4.2

lim inf⁡n→∞wnn≤lim inf⁡α→1−(1−α)U(α)≤lim sup⁡α→1−(1−α)U(α)≤lim sup⁡n→∞wnn,(A.28)\liminf_{n\to\infty} \frac{w_n}{n} \le \liminf_{\alpha\to 1^-} (1-\alpha)U(\alpha) \le \limsup_{\alpha\to 1^-} (1-\alpha)U(\alpha) \le \limsup_{n\to\infty} \frac{w_n}{n}, \tag{A.28}n→∞liminf​nwn​​≤α→1−liminf​(1−α)U(α)≤α→1−limsup​(1−α)U(α)≤n→∞limsup​nwn​​,(A.28)

and the following are equivalent: (i) all terms in (A.28) are equal and finite; (ii) lim⁡nwn/n\lim_n w_n/nlimn​wn​/n exists and is finite; (iii) lim⁡α→1−(1−α)U(α)\lim_{\alpha \to 1^-} (1-\alpha)U(\alpha)limα→1−​(1−α)U(α) exists and is finite.

No growth or boundedness condition on unu_nun​ is assumed: nonnegativity is the only Tauberian condition.

Milestones

  1. Remark A.3.3: the geometric series. R=1R = 1R=1, U(α)=B/(1−α)U(\alpha) = B/(1-\alpha)U(α)=B/(1−α) and B∑nnαn=Bα/(1−α)2B\sum_n n\alpha^n = B\alpha/(1-\alpha)^2B∑n​nαn=Bα/(1−α)2.
  2. Remark A.3.1: inside the radius of convergence, UUU is differentiable term by term, and the derived series has the same radius.
  3. Eq. (A.31): (∑αn)U(α)=∑nαnwn+1=U(α)/(1−α)\big(\sum \alpha^n\big) U(\alpha) = \sum_n \alpha^n w_{n+1} = U(\alpha)/(1-\alpha)(∑αn)U(α)=∑n​αnwn+1​=U(α)/(1−α).
  4. Eq. (A.28): the Abelian inequalities on their own.
  5. Eq. (A.26): ∫01r=1\int_0^1 r = 1∫01​r=1.
  6. Lemma A.4.1: continuous s∗≤r≤ss^* \le r \le ss∗≤r≤s with integrals within ε\varepsilonε of 111.
  7. Eqs. (A.35)–(A.36): if the Abel means tend to L<∞L < \inftyL<∞, then (1−α)∑nαnunf(αn)→L∫01f(1-\alpha)\sum_n \alpha^n u_n f(\alpha^n) \to L\int_0^1 f(1−α)∑n​αnun​f(αn)→L∫01​f for f(x)=xkf(x) = x^kf(x)=xk.
  8. The same statement for every fff continuous on [0,1][0,1][0,1].
  9. The same statement for f=rf = rf=r.
  10. Example A.5.1: a 0/10/10/1 block sequence with lim inf⁡wn/n=1/2\liminf w_n/n = 1/2liminfwn​/n=1/2 and lim sup⁡wn/n=2/3\limsup w_n/n = 2/3limsupwn​/n=2/3 (Choice One) or 111 (Choice Two), for which the middle inequality of (A.28) is strict.

Significance

The result itself. Theorem A.4.2 lets every statement about lim⁡α→1−(1−α)Vα\lim_{\alpha\to1^-}(1-\alpha)V_\alphalimα→1−​(1−α)Vα​ for a discounted value be read as a statement about long-run average cost, and conversely. The strict cases of Example A.5.1 show why the book must work with lim inf⁡\liminfliminf and lim sup⁡\limsuplimsup rather than limits: average costs of policies need not exist as limits, even for bounded costs.

Formalizing it. Mathlib contains Abel's theorem for convergent series (Mathlib/Analysis/Complex/AbelLimit.lean) and Cesàro convergence of convergent sequences, but no Tauberian theorem. The pinned checkout has no file mentioning "Tauberian", and neither does the platform. The mathematics has been proved since 1914. Formalizing it here adds:

  • a machine-checked Hardy–Littlewood–Karamata theorem for nonnegative [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]-valued sequences;
  • the lim inf⁡\liminfliminf/lim sup⁡\limsuplimsup comparison (A.28) with infinite values allowed;
  • a reusable component for the average cost chapters of this series.

Difficulty

The Abelian inequalities (A.28) follow from rearranging the series. The converse (iii) ⇒ (ii) does not: the first idea, recovering wn/nw_n/nwn​/n from (1−α)U(α)(1-\alpha)U(\alpha)(1−α)U(α) at α=1−1/n\alpha = 1 - 1/nα=1−1/n, fails, because knowing UUU near 111 controls only weighted averages of all the uku_kuk​, not a sharp truncation. Some positivity argument is unavoidable, since the converse fails for signed sequences (for example un=(−1)nnu_n = (-1)^n nun​=(−1)nn). The sharp truncation at n≈(−ln⁡α)−1n \approx (-\ln\alpha)^{-1}n≈(−lnα)−1 corresponds to the discontinuous weight rrr. Passing from polynomial weights to the jump function rrr requires uniform approximation together with the nonnegativity of the unu_nun​ at every step.

The infinite values add bookkeeping. A single un0=∞u_{n_0} = \inftyun0​​=∞ makes every term of (A.28) infinite, and R<1R < 1R<1 forces U(α)=∞U(\alpha) = \inftyU(α)=∞ on (R,1)(R,1)(R,1).

Formalization scope

Conventions the statements commit to:

  • Values. Terms u:N→[0,∞]u : \mathbb{N} \to [0,\infty]u:N→[0,∞] (ℝ≥0∞) with u0≠∞u_0 \ne \inftyu0​=∞. UUU, the Abel means, wnw_nwn​ and the Cesàro means are ℝ≥0∞-valued, with ℝ≥0∞ sums (no summability side conditions).
  • Limits. lim inf⁡\liminfliminf and lim sup⁡\limsuplimsup are those of the complete lattice [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], never real liminf. "Exists and is finite" means convergence in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] to some L≠∞L \ne \inftyL=∞.
  • Discount factor. α∈R≥0\alpha \in \mathbb{R}_{\ge 0}α∈R≥0​, and α→1−\alpha \to 1^-α→1− is the filter 𝓝[<] 1.
  • Index n=0n = 0n=0. n→∞n \to \inftyn→∞ is atTop on N\mathbb{N}N; the value w0/0=0w_0/0 = 0w0​/0=0 is irrelevant.
  • The equivalence is List.TFAE.
  • The function rrr. Its value at the jump is r(e−1)=er(e^{-1}) = er(e−1)=e (Fig. A.1).
  • Continuity. In Lemma A.4.1 and in the continuous-weight step, continuity is required on the closed interval [0,1][0,1][0,1], which is what the Weierstrass approximation step uses. The book writes "(0,1)(0,1)(0,1)".
  • Finite terms. Remark A.3.1 is stated for finite terms, which the book's discussion of the radius presumes.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out. Real-valued lim inf⁡\liminfliminf/lim sup⁡\limsuplimsup would make (A.28) hold by junk values on unbounded sequences; hypotheses such as boundedness of unu_nun​ would replace the theorem by an easier special case; and a definition of "exists and is finite" allowing L=∞L = \inftyL=∞ would make (ii) hold for un=nu_n = nun​=n. None of these is used. As sanity checks: for un≡1u_n \equiv 1un​≡1 all four terms of (A.28) equal 111, and for un=nu_n = nun​=n all equal ∞\infty∞ and (i)–(iii) all fail.

A complete development needs:

  • Cauchy products of [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]-valued power series;
  • the Weierstrass approximation theorem, which Mathlib has (polynomialFunctions.topologicalClosure);
  • interval integrals of step-like functions;
  • lim inf⁡\liminfliminf/lim sup⁡\limsuplimsup manipulation along 𝓝[<] 1.

Reusable beyond this mission: the ℝ≥0∞ power-series toolkit and the Karamata argument for general continuous weights (milestone 8). Contributions welcome: proofs of any milestone, and alternative proofs of (iii) ⇒ (ii).

Selected references

  • L. I. Sennott, Stochastic Dynamic Programming and the Control of Queueing Systems, Wiley, 1999, Appendix A.3–A.5, pp. 279–287. https://doi.org/10.1002/9780470317037
  • E. C. Titchmarsh, The Theory of Functions, 2nd ed., Oxford University Press, 1939, pp. 227–229 (Karamata's proof).
  • J. Karamata, "Über die Hardy–Littlewoodschen Umkehrungen des Abelschen Stetigkeitssatzes", Mathematische Zeitschrift 32 (1930), 319–320.
  • G. H. Hardy and J. E. Littlewood, "Tauberian theorems concerning power series and Dirichlet's series whose coefficients are positive", Proc. London Math. Soc. (2) 13 (1914), 174–191.
  • D. V. Widder, The Laplace Transform, Princeton University Press, 1941.
  • L. I. Sennott, "A new condition for the existence of optimum stationary policies in average cost Markov decision processes — unbounded cost case", Proc. 25th IEEE Conference on Decision and Control, Athens, 1986, pp. 1719–1721 (cited by the book as Sennott 1986b).
  • T. M. Liggett and S. A. Lippman, "Short notes: Stochastic games with perfect information and time average payoff", SIAM Review 11 (1969), 604–607. https://doi.org/10.1137/1011093
14 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Probability·Captain: mikedeng1

Stochastic Dynamic Programming and the Control of Queueing Systems XI: The Generalized Dominated Convergence Theorem for Approximating DistributionsTextbook

Motivation

Linn Sennott's Stochastic Dynamic Programming and the Control of Queueing Systems (Wiley, 1999) studies Markov decision chains with countably many states, finite action sets and unbounded nonnegative costs. Its main computational device, the approximating sequence method (Definition 2.5.1, p. 28), replaces the countable state space SSS by an increasing sequence of state spaces SNS_NSN​ and the transition law out of each state by distributions Pj(N)P_j(N)Pj​(N) on SNS_NSN​ that converge pointwise to the original law. Every convergence argument of that method has the same shape: a sum ∑j∈SNPj(N) u(j,N)\sum_{j\in S_N} P_j(N)\,u(j,N)∑j∈SN​​Pj​(N)u(j,N), an expected cost or value under the NNN-th approximating model, must be shown to converge to ∑j∈SPj u(j)\sum_{j\in S} P_j\,u(j)∑j∈S​Pj​u(j), or at least to satisfy a one-sided bound in the limit.

Appendix A, Sections A.1–A.2 (pp. 270–278), collects the analysis results used for this. The author proves them for sums over countable sets rather than general integrals, so they need no measure theory, and the proofs of the discounted-cost and average-cost approximation theorems (Chapters 4 and 8) cite them. This mission formalizes that appendix section as a self-contained unit.

Setting

Let SSS be a countable set and (Pj)j∈S(P_j)_{j\in S}(Pj​)j∈S​ a probability distribution on SSS: Pj≥0P_j\ge 0Pj​≥0 and ∑jPj=1\sum_j P_j=1∑j​Pj​=1. Values of functions are extended reals in [−∞,∞][-\infty,\infty][−∞,∞], with the convention 0⋅∞=00\cdot\infty=00⋅∞=0. For u:S→[−∞,∞]u:S\to[-\infty,\infty]u:S→[−∞,∞], the weighted sum is

∑j∈SPj u(j)=∑j∈SPj u+(j)−∑j∈SPj u−(j),\sum_{j\in S}P_j\,u(j)=\sum_{j\in S}P_j\,u^+(j)-\sum_{j\in S}P_j\,u^-(j),j∈S∑​Pj​u(j)=j∈S∑​Pj​u+(j)−j∈S∑​Pj​u−(j),

which is well defined, in (−∞,∞](-\infty,\infty](−∞,∞], whenever the negative parts have finite weighted sum. In Lean this is wsum P u.

A family of approximating distributions for (Pj)(P_j)(Pj​) consists of

  1. an increasing sequence of subsets S0⊆S1⊆⋯S_0\subseteq S_1\subseteq\cdotsS0​⊆S1​⊆⋯ of SSS with ⋃NSN=S\bigcup_N S_N=S⋃N​SN​=S;
  2. for each NNN, a probability distribution (Pj(N))j∈SN(P_j(N))_{j\in S_N}(Pj​(N))j∈SN​​ on SNS_NSN​;
  3. pointwise convergence lim⁡N→∞Pj(N)=Pj\lim_{N\to\infty}P_j(N)=P_jlimN→∞​Pj​(N)=Pj​ for every j∈Sj\in Sj∈S.

Since the sets increase to SSS, a fixed state jjj lies in SNS_NSN​ for every large NNN, so lim inf⁡Nu(j,N)\liminf_N u(j,N)liminfN​u(j,N) and lim⁡Nu(j,N)\lim_N u(j,N)limN​u(j,N) make sense for a function u(j,N)u(j,N)u(j,N) defined only for j∈SNj\in S_Nj∈SN​. In Lean these three conditions are the structure ApproxDist P SN Q, with Q N j =Pj(N)=P_j(N)=Pj​(N).

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem A.2.6 (Generalized Dominated Convergence Theorem), p. 278

Under the approximating-distribution hypotheses, let u(j,N)u(j,N)u(j,N) and w(j,N)w(j,N)w(j,N) be finite with ∣u(j,N)∣≤w(j,N)|u(j,N)|\le w(j,N)∣u(j,N)∣≤w(j,N) for j∈SNj\in S_Nj∈SN​, let u(j,N)→u(j)u(j,N)\to u(j)u(j,N)→u(j) and w(j,N)→w(j)w(j,N)\to w(j)w(j,N)→w(j) for every jjj, and assume

lim⁡N→∞∑j∈SNPj(N) w(j,N)=∑j∈SPj w(j)<∞.\lim_{N\to\infty}\sum_{j\in S_N}P_j(N)\,w(j,N)=\sum_{j\in S}P_j\,w(j)<\infty.N→∞lim​j∈SN​∑​Pj​(N)w(j,N)=j∈S∑​Pj​w(j)<∞.

Then

lim⁡N→∞∑j∈SNPj(N) u(j,N)=∑j∈SPj u(j).\lim_{N\to\infty}\sum_{j\in S_N}P_j(N)\,u(j,N)=\sum_{j\in S}P_j\,u(j).N→∞lim​j∈SN​∑​Pj​(N)u(j,N)=j∈S∑​Pj​u(j).

Milestones, in the book's order

  • Proposition A.1.3: lim inf⁡\liminfliminf commutes with a minimum over a finite nonempty set; lim⁡\limlim does too when all limits exist.
  • Proposition A.1.5: lim inf⁡N∑j∈Gu(j,N)≥∑j∈Glim inf⁡Nu(j,N)\liminf_N\sum_{j\in G}u(j,N)\ge\sum_{j\in G}\liminf_N u(j,N)liminfN​∑j∈G​u(j,N)≥∑j∈G​liminfN​u(j,N) for finite GGG and u>−∞u>-\inftyu>−∞, when the right side has no indeterminate form.
  • Proposition A.1.7: the same inequality for countable sums of [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]-valued terms.
  • Proposition A.1.8: the same, with the left sum over SNS_NSN​ increasing to SSS.
  • Proposition A.1.10: lim inf⁡un≤lim inf⁡wn/n≤lim sup⁡wn/n≤lim sup⁡un\liminf u_n\le\liminf w_n/n\le\limsup w_n/n\le\limsup u_nliminfun​≤liminfwn​/n≤limsupwn​/n≤limsupun​ for wn=∑k<nukw_n=\sum_{k<n}u_kwn​=∑k<n​uk​.
  • Proposition A.2.1 (Fatou's lemma): lim inf⁡N∑jPju(j,N)≥∑jPjlim inf⁡Nu(j,N)\liminf_N\sum_jP_j u(j,N)\ge\sum_jP_j\liminf_N u(j,N)liminfN​∑j​Pj​u(j,N)≥∑j​Pj​liminfN​u(j,N) for u≥−Lu\ge -Lu≥−L.
  • Theorem A.2.3 (dominated convergence, with a convergent dominating sequence w(j,N)w(j,N)w(j,N)) and Corollary A.2.4 (fixed dominating function).
  • Proposition A.2.5 (generalized Fatou's lemma):
lim inf⁡N→∞∑j∈SNPj(N) u(j,N) ≥ ∑j∈SPj lim inf⁡N→∞u(j,N)(u≥−L on SN).\liminf_{N\to\infty}\sum_{j\in S_N}P_j(N)\,u(j,N)\ \ge\ \sum_{j\in S}P_j\,\liminf_{N\to\infty}u(j,N)\qquad(u\ge -L\text{ on }S_N).N→∞liminf​j∈SN​∑​Pj​(N)u(j,N) ≥ j∈S∑​Pj​N→∞liminf​u(j,N)(u≥−L on SN​).
  • Corollary A.2.7: bounded convergence under approximating distributions.

Significance

The results. Proposition A.2.5 and Theorem A.2.6 are the two limit interchanges the approximating sequence method needs. The generalized Fatou inequality gives the lower bound on limits of value functions of the approximating models, and the generalized dominated convergence theorem identifies the limit of expected costs when a dominating function is available. Corollary A.2.7 gives the bounded case, and Proposition A.1.3 moves limits inside the minimization of an optimality equation. Proposition A.1.10 compares Cesàro averages with the sequence itself, which the average-cost chapters use.

Formalizing them. All statements are classical and proved in the book. A.1.7, A.2.1, A.2.3 and A.2.4 are, after translation, instances of Mathlib's Fatou lemma (MeasureTheory.lintegral_liminf_le) and dominated convergence theorem for a discrete measure. The mission states them in the book's discrete, extended-real form so later chapters can cite them by number. The versions in which the distribution and its support change with NNN (A.2.5–A.2.7) are not in Mathlib in this form; the generalized dominated convergence theorem appears in the measure-theoretic literature (Royden, Real Analysis, Ch. 4) but has no Lean formalization. None of these statements has been formalized for this book.

Difficulty

For the generalized results, Mathlib's Fatou lemma and dominated convergence theorem do not apply directly: they fix one measure, while here both the weights Pj(N)P_j(N)Pj​(N) and the support SNS_NSN​ change with NNN. The dominating function w(j,N)w(j,N)w(j,N) also changes with NNN and is not integrable uniformly in NNN; only the convergence of its expectations is assumed. For small NNN, ∑j∈SNPj(N)w(j,N)\sum_{j\in S_N}P_j(N)w(j,N)∑j∈SN​​Pj​(N)w(j,N) may even be infinite, and then ∑j∈SNPj(N)u(j,N)\sum_{j\in S_N} P_j(N)u(j,N)∑j∈SN​​Pj​(N)u(j,N) has no value.

A second difficulty is bookkeeping in the extended reals. Lower limits may be ±∞\pm\infty±∞, products use 0⋅∞=00\cdot\infty=00⋅∞=0, and a sum with a +∞+\infty+∞ term and a −∞-\infty−∞ term is undefined. The inequality of Proposition A.1.5 holds only when that indeterminate form is excluded. The bound u≥−Lu\ge -Lu≥−L in A.2.1 and A.2.5 cannot be dropped: Examples A.1.9 and A.2.2 of the book show the inequalities fail without it.

Formalization scope

  • Types. SSS is any type with [Countable S]. Probabilities are ℝ≥0∞-valued with ∑' j, P j = 1, and Pj(N)P_j(N)Pj​(N) is Q N j. Extended-real values are EReal, and nonnegative extended values (A.1.7, A.1.8) are ℝ≥0∞. Limits and lower and upper limits are along atTop in ℕ. The book's N≥N0N\ge N_0N≥N0​ convention (Remark A.1.2) needs nothing extra, since only large NNN matter.
  • Sums over SNS_NSN​ are sums over SSS of (SN N).indicator (Q N) times the function. Values of u(j,N)u(j,N)u(j,N) and Pj(N)P_j(N)Pj​(N) for j∉SNj\notin S_Nj∈/SN​ never enter any statement, and the hypotheses on uuu (u≥−Lu\ge -Lu≥−L, ∣u∣≤w|u|\le w∣u∣≤w) are imposed only on SNS_NSN​, as in the book.
  • Weighted sums are wsum, the difference of the weighted positive and negative parts, each in [0,∞]. When both are infinite the book's sum is undefined and wsum returns −∞-\infty−∞. Every sum used in a hypothesis or conclusion is defined, except possibly for finitely many NNN in limit statements, where it does not matter.
  • Limits of u(j,N)u(j,N)u(j,N) and w(j,N)w(j,N)w(j,N) are taken in EReal, since the book allows extended-real limits (p. 271). The hypotheses force them to be finite wherever Pj>0P_j>0Pj​>0.
  • Ruled out. Statements in which wsum returns its junk value −∞-\infty−∞ could make an inequality trivial. Every left-hand side here is a lower limit of sums whose negative parts are bounded, or a limit of eventually defined sums, so no statement holds only because of that junk value. Real-valued tsum with its junk value 000 is not used anywhere.
  • Welcome contributions. A proof of A.1.7 from lintegral_liminf_le for the counting measure, and lemmas relating wsum to Mathlib's tsum and to integrals against Measure.sum (fun j => P j • dirac j), can be reused by the other missions of this series.

Selected references

  • L. I. Sennott, Stochastic Dynamic Programming and the Control of Queueing Systems, Wiley Series in Probability and Statistics, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, Appendix A, pp. 270–278. https://doi.org/10.1002/9780470317037
  • H. L. Royden, Real Analysis, 3rd ed., Macmillan, 1988, Chapter 4 (Fatou's lemma, generalized Lebesgue convergence theorem).
  • The Mathlib Community, The Lean Mathematical Library, CPP 2020, https://doi.org/10.1145/3372885.3373824 (MeasureTheory.lintegral_liminf_le, MeasureTheory.tendsto_integral_of_dominated_convergence).
12 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisMathematical Physics·Captain: mikedeng1

Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics V: Stone's Theorem and the RAGE TheoremTextbook

Motivation

In quantum mechanics the state of a system at time ttt is ψ(t)=e−itAψ\psi(t) = \mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}\psiψ(t)=e−itAψ, where the Hamiltonian AAA is a self-adjoint operator. The spectral theorem splits the Hilbert space into subspaces according to the type of the spectral measure of a vector (absolutely continuous, singularly continuous, pure point). That splitting is defined through measure theory, and it is not evident what it has to do with the motion of the system. The RAGE theorem, named after Ruelle (1969), Amrein and Georgescu (1973) and Enß (1978), answers this. Vectors in the continuous subspace are exactly the states that, on time average, leave every bounded region: the scattering states. Vectors in the pure point subspace are exactly the states that stay in a bounded region uniformly in time: the bound states. This dynamical characterization is the starting point of the geometric approach to scattering theory and of the modern theory of quantum dynamics and transport.

This mission formalizes Chapter 5 of Teschl's Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics (AMS GSM 99, 2009). The chapter covers the time evolution e−itA\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}e−itA as a unitary group, Wiener's theorem on Fourier transforms of measures, and the abstract RAGE theorem with its Heisenberg-picture corollaries.

Setting

Let H\mathfrak HH be a complex Hilbert space with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩, conjugate linear in the first argument. An operator AAA is a linear map defined on a subspace D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A), its domain. AAA is self-adjoint if D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A) is dense and A=A∗A = A^*A=A∗. L(H)\mathfrak L(\mathfrak H)L(H) denotes the bounded, everywhere defined operators.

A projection-valued measure PPP assigns to each Borel set Ω⊆R\Omega \subseteq \mathbb RΩ⊆R an orthogonal projection P(Ω)P(\Omega)P(Ω), with P(R)=IP(\mathbb R) = \mathbb IP(R)=I and P(⋃nΩn)ψ=∑nP(Ωn)ψP(\bigcup_n \Omega_n)\psi = \sum_n P(\Omega_n)\psiP(⋃n​Ωn​)ψ=∑n​P(Ωn​)ψ for disjoint Ωn\Omega_nΩn​. The spectral measure of ψ\psiψ is the finite Borel measure μψ(Ω)=⟨ψ,P(Ω)ψ⟩\mu_\psi(\Omega) = \langle\psi, P(\Omega)\psi\rangleμψ​(Ω)=⟨ψ,P(Ω)ψ⟩. The spectral theorem says that every self-adjoint AAA is A=∫λ dP(λ)A = \int \lambda\, dP(\lambda)A=∫λdP(λ) for a unique P=PAP = P_AP=PA​. Then D(A)={ψ∣∫λ2 dμψ<∞}\mathfrak D(A) = \{\psi \mid \int\lambda^2\, d\mu_\psi < \infty\}D(A)={ψ∣∫λ2dμψ​<∞} and ⟨ψ,Aψ⟩=∫λ dμψ(λ)\langle\psi, A\psi\rangle = \int\lambda\, d\mu_\psi(\lambda)⟨ψ,Aψ⟩=∫λdμψ​(λ). For a bounded Borel function fff, f(A)f(A)f(A) is the bounded operator with ⟨ψ,f(A)ψ⟩=∫f dμψ\langle\psi, f(A)\psi\rangle = \int f\, d\mu_\psi⟨ψ,f(A)ψ⟩=∫fdμψ​. The time evolution is U(t)=e−itAU(t) = \mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}U(t)=e−itA, the case f(λ)=e−itλf(\lambda) = \mathrm e^{-\mathrm it\lambda}f(λ)=e−itλ.

The spectral subspaces are

Hac={ψ∣μψ≪Lebesgue},Hsc={ψ∣μψ singular, without atoms},Hpp={ψ∣μψ supported on a countable set},\mathfrak H_{ac} = \{\psi \mid \mu_\psi \ll \text{Lebesgue}\},\quad \mathfrak H_{sc} = \{\psi \mid \mu_\psi \text{ singular, without atoms}\},\quad \mathfrak H_{pp} = \{\psi \mid \mu_\psi \text{ supported on a countable set}\},Hac​={ψ∣μψ​≪Lebesgue},Hsc​={ψ∣μψ​ singular, without atoms},Hpp​={ψ∣μψ​ supported on a countable set},

and the continuous subspace is Hc=Hac⊕Hsc\mathfrak H_c = \mathfrak H_{ac} \oplus \mathfrak H_{sc}Hc​=Hac​⊕Hsc​. The projectors Pac,Pc,PppP^{ac}, P^c, P^{pp}Pac,Pc,Ppp are the orthogonal projections onto these subspaces. σp(A)\sigma_p(A)σp​(A) is the set of eigenvalues of AAA.

A finite rank operator is a K∈L(H)K \in \mathfrak L(\mathfrak H)K∈L(H) with finite dimensional range. The compact operators C(H)\mathfrak C(\mathfrak H)C(H) are the norm closure of the finite rank operators. For zzz in the resolvent set ρ(A)\rho(A)ρ(A), RA(z)=(A−z)−1∈L(H)R_A(z) = (A - z)^{-1} \in \mathfrak L(\mathfrak H)RA​(z)=(A−z)−1∈L(H). An operator KKK is relatively compact with respect to AAA if KRA(z)∈C(H)K R_A(z) \in \mathfrak C(\mathfrak H)KRA​(z)∈C(H) for one z∈ρ(A)z \in \rho(A)z∈ρ(A); in particular D(A)⊆D(K)\mathfrak D(A) \subseteq \mathfrak D(K)D(A)⊆D(K). The Fourier transform of a finite complex Borel measure μ\muμ on R\mathbb RR is μ^(t)=∫Re−itλ dμ(λ)\hat\mu(t) = \int_{\mathbb R} \mathrm e^{-\mathrm it\lambda}\, d\mu(\lambda)μ^​(t)=∫R​e−itλdμ(λ).

Formalization targets

Goal: the RAGE theorem (Theorem 5.7)

Let AAA be self-adjoint and let Kn∈L(H)K_n \in \mathfrak L(\mathfrak H)Kn​∈L(H) be relatively compact operators converging strongly to I\mathbb II. Then

Hc={ψ  ∣  lim⁡n→∞lim⁡T→∞1T∫0T∥Kne−itAψ∥ dt=0},Hpp={ψ  ∣  lim⁡n→∞sup⁡t≥0∥(I−Kn)e−itAψ∥=0}.\mathfrak H_c = \Big\{\psi \;\Big|\; \lim_{n\to\infty}\lim_{T\to\infty} \frac1T\int_0^T \|K_n\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}\psi\|\, dt = 0\Big\},\qquad \mathfrak H_{pp} = \Big\{\psi \;\Big|\; \lim_{n\to\infty}\sup_{t\ge0} \|(\mathbb I - K_n)\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}\psi\| = 0\Big\}.Hc​={ψ​n→∞lim​T→∞lim​T1​∫0T​∥Kn​e−itAψ∥dt=0},Hpp​={ψ​n→∞lim​t≥0sup​∥(I−Kn​)e−itAψ∥=0}.

Milestones

  • Theorem 5.1. U(t)=e−itAU(t) = \mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}U(t)=e−itA is a strongly continuous one-parameter unitary group. lim⁡t→01t(U(t)ψ−ψ)\lim_{t\to0}\frac1t(U(t)\psi - \psi)limt→0​t1​(U(t)ψ−ψ) exists iff ψ∈D(A)\psi \in \mathfrak D(A)ψ∈D(A), and then it equals −iAψ-\mathrm iA\psi−iAψ. U(t)D(A)=D(A)U(t)\mathfrak D(A) = \mathfrak D(A)U(t)D(A)=D(A) and AU(t)=U(t)AAU(t) = U(t)AAU(t)=U(t)A.
  • Theorem 5.4 (Wiener). lim⁡T→∞1T∫0T∣μ^(t)∣2 dt=∑λ∈R∣μ({λ})∣2\displaystyle\lim_{T\to\infty}\frac1T\int_0^T|\hat\mu(t)|^2\,dt = \sum_{\lambda\in\mathbb R}|\mu(\{\lambda\})|^2T→∞lim​T1​∫0T​∣μ^​(t)∣2dt=λ∈R∑​∣μ({λ})∣2, and the sum is finite.
  • Lemma 5.5. C(H)\mathfrak C(\mathfrak H)C(H) is a closed ∗*∗-ideal in L(H)\mathfrak L(\mathfrak H)L(H).
  • Theorem 5.6. For relatively compact KKK and ψ∈D(A)\psi \in \mathfrak D(A)ψ∈D(A): 1T∫0T∥Ke−itAPcψ∥2dt→0\frac1T\int_0^T\|K\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}P^c\psi\|^2dt \to 0T1​∫0T​∥Ke−itAPcψ∥2dt→0 and ∥Ke−itAPacψ∥→0\|K\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}P^{ac}\psi\| \to 0∥Ke−itAPacψ∥→0. For bounded KKK this holds for all ψ\psiψ.
  • Theorem 5.8. lim⁡T→∞1T∫0TeitAKe−itAψ dt=∑λ∈σp(A)PA({λ})KPA({λ})ψ\displaystyle\lim_{T\to\infty}\frac1T\int_0^T \mathrm e^{\mathrm itA}K\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}\psi\,dt = \sum_{\lambda\in\sigma_p(A)}P_A(\{\lambda\})KP_A(\{\lambda\})\psiT→∞lim​T1​∫0T​eitAKe−itAψdt=λ∈σp​(A)∑​PA​({λ})KPA​({λ})ψ for ψ∈D(A)\psi \in \mathfrak D(A)ψ∈D(A), and for all ψ\psiψ if KKK is bounded.
  • Corollary 5.9. Under the RAGE assumptions, the iterated time averages of eitAKne−itAψ\mathrm e^{\mathrm itA}K_n\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}\psieitAKn​e−itAψ and of eitA(I−Kn)e−itAψ\mathrm e^{\mathrm itA}(\mathbb I - K_n)\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}\psieitA(I−Kn​)e−itAψ converge to PppψP^{pp}\psiPppψ and to PcψP^c\psiPcψ.

Significance

The RAGE theorem connects the spectral types of the Hamiltonian with observable long-time behaviour. For Schrödinger operators −Δ+V-\Delta + V−Δ+V on L2(Rn)L^2(\mathbb R^n)L2(Rn), taking KnK_nKn​ to be multiplication by the indicator of the ball of radius nnn gives a sequence of relatively compact operators. The theorem then says that states in Hc\mathfrak H_cHc​ spend, on time average, a vanishing fraction of time in every ball, while states in Hpp\mathfrak H_{pp}Hpp​ stay uniformly localized. Enß's proof of asymptotic completeness for short-range potentials rests on this characterization. The same argument, through Wiener's theorem, is used to relate the fractal dimensions of spectral measures to rates of quantum transport. Theorem 5.8 and Corollary 5.9 describe the asymptotic observables of the Heisenberg picture.

These results are classical and proved in the literature. They are not formalized. Mathlib has neither a spectral theorem nor a functional calculus for unbounded self-adjoint operators, and no decomposition of a Hilbert space by spectral type. What the platform has are Stone's theorem in the separate BookProof development (for weakly measurable groups, with its own structure of unbounded self-adjoint operators) and the discrete-time von Neumann mean ergodic theorem for contractions. The mean ergodic theorem is related to Theorem 5.8 with K=IK = \mathbb IK=I but is a different statement. This mission formalizes the continuous-time, spectral-type-resolved statements.

Difficulty

The two sides of the RAGE characterization are defined in unrelated terms. Hc\mathfrak H_cHc​ and Hpp\mathfrak H_{pp}Hpp​ are defined by properties of the scalar measures μψ\mu_\psiμψ​, while the conditions in (5.14) concern norms of vectors moving under a unitary group and seen through operators that are only relatively compact. Wiener's theorem controls scalar quantities ⟨φ,e−itAψ⟩\langle\varphi, \mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}\psi\rangle⟨φ,e−itAψ⟩. Passing to norms ∥Ke−itAψ∥\|K\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}\psi\|∥Ke−itAψ∥ needs compactness, and relative compactness only gives compactness after composing with a resolvent, which is where the restriction to D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A) in Theorems 5.6 and 5.8 comes from. The pure point characterization needs control that is uniform in t≥0t \ge 0t≥0, so a limit over nnn has to be exchanged with a supremum over all times. The limits in (5.14) and (5.19)–(5.20) are iterated, not joint, and a naive exchange of the two limits is not justified. Summing over σp(A)\sigma_p(A)σp​(A) in (5.18) needs an unconditionally convergent sum over a possibly uncountable index set. Wiener's theorem itself needs a Fubini argument for a complex measure against its conjugate.

Formalization scope

The formalization uses Lean 4 with Mathlib. Operators are partially defined linear maps (LinearPMap, H →ₗ.[ℂ] H) on a complex Hilbert space. Self-adjointness is Mathlib's IsSelfAdjoint, which includes density of the domain. The Hilbert space is not assumed separable.

The spectral theorem is not part of this mission. Every statement about AAA takes a projection-valued measure PPP on the Borel sets of R\mathbb RR as data, together with the hypothesis that A=∫λ dP(λ)A = \int\lambda\, dP(\lambda)A=∫λdP(λ): D(A)={ψ∣∫λ2dμψ<∞}\mathfrak D(A) = \{\psi \mid \int\lambda^2 d\mu_\psi < \infty\}D(A)={ψ∣∫λ2dμψ​<∞} and ⟨ψ,Aψ⟩=∫λ dμψ\langle\psi, A\psi\rangle = \int\lambda\,d\mu_\psi⟨ψ,Aψ⟩=∫λdμψ​ there. This is the form the spectral theorem guarantees, and it makes PA=PP_A = PPA​=P. The time evolution e−itA\mathrm e^{-\mathrm itA}e−itA is the bounded operator P(λ↦e−itλ)P(\lambda \mapsto \mathrm e^{-\mathrm it\lambda})P(λ↦e−itλ), determined by its quadratic form, and eitA\mathrm e^{\mathrm itA}eitA is its value at −t-t−t. Nothing else the book derives is assumed.

The spectral subspaces are sets of vectors defined only from the spectral measures, as above, and Hc\mathfrak H_cHc​ is the set of sums of a vector of Hac\mathfrak H_{ac}Hac​ and a vector of Hsc\mathfrak H_{sc}Hsc​. A formalization that defined Hc\mathfrak H_cHc​ or Hpp\mathfrak H_{pp}Hpp​ by the dynamical conditions of (5.14) would make the goal a tautology; that is ruled out here. PcP^cPc, PacP^{ac}Pac, PppP^{pp}Ppp are the orthogonal projections onto the closed linear spans of these sets. Compact operators are the norm closure of the finite rank operators (the book's definition), not Mathlib's IsCompactOperator. Relative compactness asks for one z∈ρ(A)z \in \rho(A)z∈ρ(A), its resolvent RRR, and a compact CCC with Ran⁡R⊆D(K)\operatorname{Ran} R \subseteq \mathfrak D(K)RanR⊆D(K) and KR=CKR = CKR=C. "KKK bounded" means an everywhere defined K∈L(H)K \in \mathfrak L(\mathfrak H)K∈L(H).

Iterated limits lim⁡nlim⁡T\lim_n\lim_Tlimn​limT​ are stated as: for every nnn the inner limit exists, and the sequence of inner limits converges. The supremum over t≥0t \ge 0t≥0 is taken in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. Time averages use interval integrals, with Bochner integrals for vector-valued integrands; all integrands are continuous in ttt. Wiener's theorem uses Mathlib's ComplexMeasure ℝ and its vector-measure integral. The sum over λ∈R\lambda \in \mathbb Rλ∈R is an unconditional sum whose summability is part of the conclusion, and the sum over σp(A)\sigma_p(A)σp​(A) is an unconditional sum in H\mathfrak HH. The Fourier transform has the book's normalization.

A complete development needs a functional calculus for projection-valued measures (multiplicativity, strong continuity in the function argument), the reduction of AAA by the spectral subspaces (Lemma 3.19), the Riemann–Lebesgue lemma for absolutely continuous measures, and the approximation of compact operators by finite rank ones. These pieces are reusable across the rest of the book, notably for scattering theory. Proofs of any milestone, and of such supporting lemmas, are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics, With Applications to Schrödinger Operators, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 99, American Mathematical Society, 2009. doi:10.1090/gsm/099. Chapter 5, pp. 123–132.
  • D. Ruelle, A remark on bound states in potential-scattering theory, Il Nuovo Cimento A 61 (1969), 655–662. doi:10.1007/BF02819607.
  • W. O. Amrein and V. Georgescu, On the characterization of bound states and scattering states in quantum mechanics, Helvetica Physica Acta 46 (1973), 635–658 (archive: e-periodica.ch).
  • V. Enss, Asymptotic completeness for quantum mechanical potential scattering. I. Short range potentials, Communications in Mathematical Physics 61 (1978), 285–291. doi:10.1007/BF01940771.
  • M. H. Stone, On one-parameter unitary groups in Hilbert space, Annals of Mathematics 33 (1932), 643–648. doi:10.2307/1968538.
16 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Dynamical Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems X: Periodic Orbits and the Poincaré MapTextbook

Motivation

Periodic solutions are the simplest non-stationary long-time behaviour of an autonomous system x˙=f(x)\dot x = f(x)x˙=f(x): limit cycles in oscillators and population models, closed orbits of conservative systems. The first question about a periodic orbit is whether it is stable. Poincaré introduced the first-return map on a transversal section, which turns this question into a question about a fixed point of a map in one dimension less. Floquet theory attacks the same question through the linear periodic system obtained by linearizing along the orbit. This mission formalizes Chapter 12, §§12.1–12.2 of G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, 2012; author's preliminary version, DOI of the published book). That chapter proves the two approaches agree and derives the standard stability and persistence criteria from this.

Setting

Let M⊆RnM \subseteq \mathbb{R}^nM⊆Rn be open, f∈Ck(M,Rn)f \in C^k(M, \mathbb{R}^n)f∈Ck(M,Rn) with k≥1k \ge 1k≥1, and let Φ(t,x)\Phi(t, x)Φ(t,x) be the flow of x˙=f(x)\dot x = f(x)x˙=f(x) with maximal intervals IxI_xIx​: t↦Φ(t,x)t \mapsto \Phi(t,x)t↦Φ(t,x) is the unique maximal solution with Φ(0,x)=x\Phi(0,x) = xΦ(0,x)=x. A point x0∈Mx_0 \in Mx0​∈M is periodic with period T>0T > 0T>0 if Φ(T,x0)=x0\Phi(T, x_0) = x_0Φ(T,x0​)=x0​ and Φ(t,x0)≠x0\Phi(t, x_0) \neq x_0Φ(t,x0​)=x0​ for 0<t<T0 < t < T0<t<T. Its orbit γ(x0)={Φ(t,x0)}\gamma(x_0) = \{\Phi(t, x_0)\}γ(x0​)={Φ(t,x0​)} is then a closed curve.

Linearization along the orbit. Put A(t)=dfΦ(t,x0)A(t) = df_{\Phi(t, x_0)}A(t)=dfΦ(t,x0​)​, a TTT-periodic matrix. The first variational equation is y˙=A(t)y\dot y = A(t) yy˙​=A(t)y, and Πx0(t,t0)\Pi_{x_0}(t, t_0)Πx0​​(t,t0​) denotes its principal matrix solution: ∂tΠ=A(t)Π\partial_t \Pi = A(t)\Pi∂t​Π=A(t)Π, Π(t0,t0)=I\Pi(t_0, t_0) = \mathbb{I}Π(t0​,t0​)=I. The monodromy matrix based at Φ(t0,x0)\Phi(t_0,x_0)Φ(t0​,x0​) is

Mx0(t0)=∂ΦT∂x(Φ(t0,x0)).M_{x_0}(t_0) = \frac{\partial \Phi_T}{\partial x}\big(\Phi(t_0, x_0)\big).Mx0​​(t0​)=∂x∂ΦT​​(Φ(t0​,x0​)).

The Poincaré map. A transversal section is Σ={x∈U∣S(x)=0}\Sigma = \{x \in U \mid S(x) = 0\}Σ={x∈U∣S(x)=0} with UUU open, S∈Ck(U)S \in C^k(U)S∈Ck(U), ∂S/∂x≠0\partial S/\partial x \ne 0∂S/∂x=0 and (∂S/∂x) f≠0(\partial S/\partial x)\, f \neq 0(∂S/∂x)f=0 on Σ\SigmaΣ. If x0∈Σx_0 \in \Sigmax0​∈Σ there is a CkC^kCk return time τ\tauτ near x0x_0x0​ with τ(x0)=T\tau(x_0) = Tτ(x0​)=T and Φ(τ(y),y)∈Σ\Phi(\tau(y), y) \in \SigmaΦ(τ(y),y)∈Σ. The Poincaré map is

PΣ(y)=Φ(τ(y),y).P_\Sigma(y) = \Phi(\tau(y), y).PΣ​(y)=Φ(τ(y),y).

Its derivative dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) is a linear map of the (n−1)(n-1)(n−1)-dimensional tangent space Tx0Σ=ker⁡∂S∂x(x0)T_{x_0}\Sigma = \ker \frac{\partial S}{\partial x}(x_0)Tx0​​Σ=ker∂x∂S​(x0​) into itself.

Stability. The orbit γ\gammaγ is stable if every neighborhood UUU of γ\gammaγ contains a neighborhood VVV of γ\gammaγ from which solutions stay in UUU for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0. It is asymptotically stable if moreover d(Φ(t,x),γ)→0d(\Phi(t,x), \gamma) \to 0d(Φ(t,x),γ)→0 for all xxx in some neighborhood of γ\gammaγ. A periodic orbit is hyperbolic if dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) has no eigenvalue on the unit circle.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 12.4

For every t0∈Rt_0 \in \mathbb{R}t0​∈R,

χMx0(t0)(X)=(X−1) χdPΣ(x0)(X),\chi_{M_{x_0}(t_0)}(X) = (X - 1)\,\chi_{dP_\Sigma(x_0)}(X),χMx0​​(t0​)​(X)=(X−1)χdPΣ​(x0​)​(X),

where χ\chiχ is the characteristic polynomial. So the eigenvalues of dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) together with the single value 111 are exactly the eigenvalues of the monodromy matrix, with multiplicities. In particular they depend neither on the section Σ\SigmaΣ nor on the base point on the orbit.

Milestones

  • Lemma 12.1. Πx0(t,t0)=∂Φt−t0∂x(Φ(t0,x0))\Pi_{x_0}(t,t_0) = \frac{\partial\Phi_{t-t_0}}{\partial x}(\Phi(t_0,x_0))Πx0​​(t,t0​)=∂x∂Φt−t0​​​(Φ(t0​,x0​)), and f(Φ(t,x0))=Πx0(t,t0)f(Φ(t0,x0))f(\Phi(t,x_0)) = \Pi_{x_0}(t,t_0) f(\Phi(t_0,x_0))f(Φ(t,x0​))=Πx0​​(t,t0​)f(Φ(t0​,x0​)).
  • Corollary 12.3. If every eigenvalue of dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) has modulus <1< 1<1, then γ(x0)\gamma(x_0)γ(x0​) is asymptotically stable.
  • Corollary 12.5. det⁡dPΣ(x0)=det⁡Mx0(t0)≠0\det dP_\Sigma(x_0) = \det M_{x_0}(t_0) \neq 0detdPΣ​(x0​)=detMx0​​(t0​)=0, and PΣP_\SigmaPΣ​ is a local CkC^kCk diffeomorphism of Σ\SigmaΣ at x0x_0x0​.
  • Lemma 12.6. For n=2n = 2n=2, γ(x0)\gamma(x_0)γ(x0​) is asymptotically stable if ∫0Tdiv⁡f(Φ(t,x0)) dt<0\int_0^T \operatorname{div} f(\Phi(t,x_0))\,dt < 0∫0T​divf(Φ(t,x0​))dt<0 and unstable if the integral is positive.
  • Lemma 12.7. If f(x,0)f(x,0)f(x,0) has a hyperbolic periodic orbit through x0x_0x0​ and f(x,μ)f(x,\mu)f(x,μ) is CkC^kCk, then on a neighborhood of μ=0\mu = 0μ=0 there is a CkC^kCk family x0(μ)x_0(\mu)x0​(μ) with x0(0)=x0x_0(0) = x_0x0​(0)=x0​ and each x0(μ)x_0(\mu)x0​(μ) periodic for f(⋅,μ)f(\cdot,\mu)f(⋅,μ).

Significance

The result. Theorem 12.4 is the bridge between the two standard tools for periodic orbits. The Floquet multipliers of y˙=A(t)y\dot y = A(t)yy˙​=A(t)y can often be computed or estimated, for instance through Liouville's formula det⁡Mx0(t0)=exp⁡∫0Tdiv⁡f(Φ(t,x0)) dt\det M_{x_0}(t_0) = \exp\int_0^T \operatorname{div} f(\Phi(t,x_0))\,dtdetMx0​​(t0​)=exp∫0T​divf(Φ(t,x0​))dt. The Poincaré map is where the dynamics is decided, for instance through the fixed-point stability theory of maps. Corollaries 12.3 and 12.5 and Lemma 12.6 are the resulting stability tests. Lemma 12.7 is the structural-stability statement for hyperbolic orbits that bifurcation theory starts from. Theorems 12.8–12.10 (stable manifolds of periodic orbits) build on the same objects.

Formalizing it. All results are classical and proved in the book. None has a machine-checked proof on the platform or, as far as is known, in Mathlib, which has neither Poincaré maps nor the linearization of flows along orbits. The work is a formalization of the known proofs. It needs differentiability of the flow with respect to initial conditions, and that part is reusable across the whole of qualitative ODE theory.

Difficulty

The algebra of Theorem 12.4 is short. The two linear maps act on different spaces: Mx0(0)M_{x_0}(0)Mx0​​(0) on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, and dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) on the hyperplane Tx0ΣT_{x_0}\SigmaTx0​​Σ. That hyperplane is in general not orthogonal to f(x0)f(x_0)f(x0​), not a coordinate hyperplane, and not invariant under Mx0(0)M_{x_0}(0)Mx0​​(0). Any comparison has to go through the derivative of y↦Φ(τ(y),y)y \mapsto \Phi(\tau(y), y)y↦Φ(τ(y),y), which involves the derivative of the implicitly defined return time. Behind all this sits the differentiability of Φ\PhiΦ in xxx and the variational equation it satisfies, which Mathlib does not provide for local flows. For the stability milestones, the delicate step is passing from the discrete iterates of PΣP_\SigmaPΣ​ on Σ\SigmaΣ back to the continuous flow near the whole orbit. That requires uniform control over one period.

Formalization scope

The state space is Fin n → ℝ. Norm-dependent notions (distance to the orbit, neighborhoods) do not depend on the choice of norm. The flow is local: IsMaximalFlow f M I Φ characterizes Φ\PhiΦ and IxI_xIx​ by maximality and uniqueness, and Φ\PhiΦ's values outside its domain are never used. Derivatives are Mathlib's fderiv. The section Σ\SigmaΣ is the book's general {S=0}\{S = 0\}{S=0} with (∂S/∂x)f≠0(\partial S/\partial x)f \neq 0(∂S/∂x)f=0, not a hyperplane chosen orthogonal to f(x0)f(x_0)f(x0​). The return time τ\tauτ is any CkC^kCk function on a neighborhood of x0x_0x0​ with τ(x0)=T\tau(x_0) = Tτ(x0​)=T and Φ(τ(y),y)∈Σ\Phi(\tau(y),y) \in \SigmaΦ(τ(y),y)∈Σ; such a function agrees with the book's τ\tauτ near x0x_0x0​. dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) is an endomorphism L of LinearMap.ker (fderiv ℝ S x₀) that agrees with the derivative of y↦Φ(τ(y),y)y \mapsto \Phi(\tau(y), y)y↦Φ(τ(y),y) there (IsPoincareDerivative). Theorems 12.4 and 12.5 assert that it exists. Eigenvalues are complex roots of characteristic polynomials.

Conventions and readings:

  • The goal compares characteristic polynomials, so multiplicities count. Equality of eigenvalue sets, a statement at a single convenient t0t_0t0​, or a hyperplane section would each be weaker than the book's theorem and do not count as solving the goal.
  • The monodromy matrix is ∂ΦT∂x(Φ(t0,x0))\frac{\partial\Phi_T}{\partial x}(\Phi(t_0,x_0))∂x∂ΦT​​(Φ(t0​,x0​)). The book prints ΦT−t0\Phi_{T-t_0}ΦT−t0​​ on p. 316, a typo inconsistent with (12.5) and (12.8).
  • "Periodic orbit" means positive least period. Fixed points are excluded, since there is no transversal section through them. In dimension n≤1n \le 1n≤1 no such orbit exists, and the statements are vacuous there as in the book.
  • "Hyperbolic periodic orbit" is not defined in the preliminary version. The definition used is the one the proof of Lemma 12.7 uses: no eigenvalue of dPΣ(x0)dP_\Sigma(x_0)dPΣ​(x0​) on the unit circle, for some transversal section.
  • Lemma 12.7: "in a sufficiently small neighborhood of 000" is read as: there exists an open W∋0W \ni 0W∋0 inside the parameter set on which x0(⋅)x_0(\cdot)x0​(⋅) is CkC^kCk. The parameter lies in Rp\mathbb{R}^pRp.
  • Corollary 12.5: "local diffeomorphism at x0x_0x0​" is read as: PΣP_\SigmaPΣ​ maps W∩ΣW \cap \SigmaW∩Σ bijectively onto W′∩ΣW' \cap \SigmaW′∩Σ for open W,W′∋x0W, W' \ni x_0W,W′∋x0​, with an inverse that is the restriction of a CkC^kCk map on W′W'W′.
  • (12.1) is stated for all xxx in a neighborhood of the orbit. The book writes U(x0)U(x_0)U(x0​) right after introducing U(γ(x0))U(\gamma(x_0))U(γ(x0​)).

Needed infrastructure: existence, uniqueness and CkC^kCk dependence on initial conditions for local flows; the implicit function theorem (Mathlib); characteristic polynomials and determinants of endomorphisms of finite-dimensional subspaces (Mathlib); Liouville's formula; stability of fixed points of C1C^1C1 maps with contracting linearization. Contributions of any of these as standalone lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, AMS, 2012. https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/140 (preliminary version: https://www.mat.univie.ac.at/~gerald/ftp/book-ode/ode.pdf)
  • H. Poincaré, Mémoire sur les courbes définies par une équation différentielle, J. Math. Pures Appl. (3) 7 (1881) 375–422. http://www.numdam.org/item/JMPA_1881_3_7__375_0/
  • G. Floquet, Sur les équations différentielles linéaires à coefficients périodiques, Ann. Sci. ÉNS (2) 12 (1883) 47–88. https://doi.org/10.24033/asens.220
  • P. Hartman, Ordinary Differential Equations, 2nd ed., SIAM Classics in Applied Mathematics 38, 2002. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898719222
22 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisMathematical Physics·Captain: mikedeng1

Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics X: The Uncertainty Principle and the Harmonic OscillatorTextbook

Motivation

The quantum harmonic oscillator is the Schrödinger operator of a particle in a quadratic potential. It describes small vibrations around an equilibrium, the modes of the electromagnetic field, and phonons in a crystal. It is also one of the very few Schrödinger operators whose spectrum and eigenfunctions are known in closed form. The eigenvalues are equally spaced, and the eigenfunctions are Hermite functions. Its algebraic treatment by creation and annihilation operators goes back to Dirac (The Principles of Quantum Mechanics, 1930). That treatment became the template for second quantization and Fock space.

The same chapter of G. Teschl's Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics (AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 99, 2009, Chapter 8, AMS page) contains two further results that use commutation relations. The first is the Heisenberg uncertainty principle (Heisenberg 1927; the general form for two observables is due to Robertson, Phys. Rev. 34 (1929)). The second is an abstract statement that A∗AA^*AA∗A and AA∗AA^*AA∗ have the same spectrum away from 000. Physicists call this supersymmetric quantum mechanics, and Teschl uses it later for the hydrogen atom. This mission follows Teschl's Sections 8.1–8.4.

Setting

Let H\mathfrak HH be a complex Hilbert space. A linear operator AAA is a linear map defined on a subspace D(A)⊆H\mathfrak D(A) \subseteq \mathfrak HD(A)⊆H, its domain. AAA is symmetric if D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A) is dense and ⟨φ,Aψ⟩=⟨Aφ,ψ⟩\langle \varphi, A\psi\rangle = \langle A\varphi, \psi\rangle⟨φ,Aψ⟩=⟨Aφ,ψ⟩ for all φ,ψ∈D(A)\varphi, \psi \in \mathfrak D(A)φ,ψ∈D(A). For a closed operator AAA and z∈Cz \in \mathbb Cz∈C, the resolvent RA(z)=(A−z)−1R_A(z) = (A - z)^{-1}RA​(z)=(A−z)−1 exists when A−zA - zA−z maps D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A) bijectively onto H\mathfrak HH with a bounded inverse. The resolvent set ρ(A)\rho(A)ρ(A) is the set of such zzz, and the spectrum is σ(A)=C∖ρ(A)\sigma(A) = \mathbb C \setminus \rho(A)σ(A)=C∖ρ(A). An operator is essentially self-adjoint on its domain if its closure A‾\overline AA is self-adjoint.

For ψ∈D(A)\psi \in \mathfrak D(A)ψ∈D(A) with ∥ψ∥=1\|\psi\| = 1∥ψ∥=1 (a state), the expectation is Eψ(A)=⟨ψ,Aψ⟩\mathbb E_\psi(A) = \langle\psi, A\psi\rangleEψ​(A)=⟨ψ,Aψ⟩ and the mean-square deviation is Δψ(A)=∥(A−Eψ(A))ψ∥\Delta_\psi(A) = \|(A - \mathbb E_\psi(A))\psi\|Δψ​(A)=∥(A−Eψ​(A))ψ∥. The commutator is [A,B]ψ=ABψ−BAψ[A,B]\psi = AB\psi - BA\psi[A,B]ψ=ABψ−BAψ for ψ∈D(AB)∩D(BA)\psi \in \mathfrak D(AB) \cap \mathfrak D(BA)ψ∈D(AB)∩D(BA), where D(AB)={ψ∈D(B)∣Bψ∈D(A)}\mathfrak D(AB) = \{\psi \in \mathfrak D(B) \mid B\psi \in \mathfrak D(A)\}D(AB)={ψ∈D(B)∣Bψ∈D(A)}.

Fix a frequency ω>0\omega > 0ω>0. On R3\mathbb R^3R3 with Lebesgue measure, let

Dω=span⁡{xαe−ω∣x∣2/2∣α∈N03}⊆L2(R3),\mathfrak D_\omega = \operatorname{span}\{x^\alpha e^{-\omega|x|^2/2} \mid \alpha \in \mathbb N_0^3\} \subseteq L^2(\mathbb R^3),Dω​=span{xαe−ω∣x∣2/2∣α∈N03​}⊆L2(R3),

where xα=x1α1x2α2x3α3x^\alpha = x_1^{\alpha_1}x_2^{\alpha_2}x_3^{\alpha_3}xα=x1α1​​x2α2​​x3α3​​ and ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ is the Euclidean norm. With Δ=∑j∂2/∂xj2\Delta = \sum_j \partial^2/\partial x_j^2Δ=∑j​∂2/∂xj2​ and Teschl's units (ℏ=1\hbar = 1ℏ=1, mass 1/21/21/2, so the free Hamiltonian is H0=−ΔH_0 = -\DeltaH0​=−Δ), the harmonic oscillator is the operator

H=H0+ω2x2,(Hf)(x)=−Δf(x)+ω2∣x∣2f(x),D(H)=Dω.H = H_0 + \omega^2 x^2, \qquad (Hf)(x) = -\Delta f(x) + \omega^2|x|^2 f(x), \qquad \mathfrak D(H) = \mathfrak D_\omega.H=H0​+ω2x2,(Hf)(x)=−Δf(x)+ω2∣x∣2f(x),D(H)=Dω​.

In one dimension the ladder operators on span⁡{xke−ωx2/2}\operatorname{span}\{x^k e^{-\omega x^2/2}\}span{xke−ωx2/2} are

A±=12(ω x∓1ωddx).A_\pm = \frac{1}{\sqrt2}\Big(\sqrt\omega\,x \mp \frac{1}{\sqrt\omega}\frac{d}{dx}\Big).A±​=2​1​(ω​x∓ω​1​dxd​).

The Hermite polynomials are Hn(x)=(−1)nex2dndxne−x2H_n(x) = (-1)^n e^{x^2}\frac{d^n}{dx^n}e^{-x^2}Hn​(x)=(−1)nex2dxndn​e−x2. The Hermite functions are

ψn(x)=12nn!(ωπ)1/4Hn(ω x) e−ωx2/2,\psi_n(x) = \frac{1}{\sqrt{2^n n!}}\Big(\frac\omega\pi\Big)^{1/4} H_n(\sqrt\omega\,x)\,e^{-\omega x^2/2},ψn​(x)=2nn!​1​(πω​)1/4Hn​(ω​x)e−ωx2/2,

and on R3\mathbb R^3R3, ψn1,n2,n3(x)=ψn1(x1)ψn2(x2)ψn3(x3)\psi_{n_1,n_2,n_3}(x) = \psi_{n_1}(x_1)\psi_{n_2}(x_2)\psi_{n_3}(x_3)ψn1​,n2​,n3​​(x)=ψn1​​(x1​)ψn2​​(x2​)ψn3​​(x3​).

Formalization targets

Goal: the harmonic oscillator (Theorem 8.5)

For every ω>0\omega > 0ω>0 the operator HHH above exists. It is essentially self-adjoint on Dω\mathfrak D_\omegaDω​, the functions ψn1,n2,n3\psi_{n_1,n_2,n_3}ψn1​,n2​,n3​​, (n1,n2,n3)∈N03(n_1,n_2,n_3) \in \mathbb N_0^3(n1​,n2​,n3​)∈N03​, form an orthonormal basis of L2(R3)L^2(\mathbb R^3)L2(R3) consisting of eigenvectors of HHH, and

σ(H‾)={(2n+3)ω∣n∈N0}.\sigma(\overline H) = \{(2n + 3)\omega \mid n \in \mathbb N_0\}.σ(H)={(2n+3)ω∣n∈N0​}.

Milestones

  • Density (Lemma 8.3). span⁡{xαe−∣x∣2/2∣α∈N0n}\operatorname{span}\{x^\alpha e^{-|x|^2/2} \mid \alpha \in \mathbb N_0^n\}span{xαe−∣x∣2/2∣α∈N0n​} is dense in L2(Rn)L^2(\mathbb R^n)L2(Rn) for every nnn.
  • Canonical commutation relation (Eq. (8.36)). [A−,A+]=1[A_-, A_+] = 1[A−​,A+​]=1 on span⁡{xke−ωx2/2}\operatorname{span}\{x^k e^{-\omega x^2/2}\}span{xke−ωx2/2}.
  • Factorization (Eq. (8.37)). On the same space, −d2dx2+ω2x2=ω(2N+1)-\frac{d^2}{dx^2} + \omega^2x^2 = \omega(2N + 1)−dx2d2​+ω2x2=ω(2N+1) with N=A+A−N = A_+A_-N=A+​A−​, and the space is invariant under A±A_\pmA±​.
  • Hermite functions (Eqs. (8.40)–(8.42)). ψn=A+nψ0/n!\psi_n = A_+^n\psi_0/\sqrt{n!}ψn​=A+n​ψ0​/n!​ with ψ0(x)=(ω/π)1/4e−ωx2/2\psi_0(x) = (\omega/\pi)^{1/4}e^{-\omega x^2/2}ψ0​(x)=(ω/π)1/4e−ωx2/2. Each ψn\psi_nψn​ is a normalized eigenfunction of NNN for the eigenvalue nnn, and span⁡{ψn}=span⁡{xke−ωx2/2}\operatorname{span}\{\psi_n\} = \operatorname{span}\{x^k e^{-\omega x^2/2}\}span{ψn​}=span{xke−ωx2/2}.
  • Heisenberg uncertainty principle (Theorem 8.2). For symmetric AAA, BBB and a state ψ∈D(AB)∩D(BA)\psi \in \mathfrak D(AB) \cap \mathfrak D(BA)ψ∈D(AB)∩D(BA),
Δψ(A) Δψ(B)≥12 ∣Eψ([A,B])∣,\Delta_\psi(A)\,\Delta_\psi(B) \ge \tfrac12\,|\mathbb E_\psi([A,B])|,Δψ​(A)Δψ​(B)≥21​∣Eψ​([A,B])∣,

with equality if (B−Eψ(B))ψ=iλ(A−Eψ(A))ψ(B - \mathbb E_\psi(B))\psi = i\lambda(A - \mathbb E_\psi(A))\psi(B−Eψ​(B))ψ=iλ(A−Eψ​(A))ψ for a real λ≠0\lambda \ne 0λ=0, or if ψ\psiψ is an eigenvector of AAA or BBB.

  • Abstract commutation (Theorem 8.6). For AAA closed and densely defined, A∗A∣Ker⁡(A)⊥A^*A|_{\operatorname{Ker}(A)^\perp}A∗A∣Ker(A)⊥​ and AA∗∣Ker⁡(A∗)⊥AA^*|_{\operatorname{Ker}(A^*)^\perp}AA∗∣Ker(A∗)⊥​ are unitarily equivalent. AAA maps eigenvectors of A∗AA^*AA∗A (eigenvalue EEE) to eigenvectors of AA∗AA^*AA∗ with ∥Aψ0∥=E ∥ψ0∥\|A\psi_0\| = \sqrt E\,\|\psi_0\|∥Aψ0​∥=E​∥ψ0​∥. For z≠0z \ne 0z=0,
RAA∗(z)⊇1z(ARA∗A(z)A∗−1),RA∗A(z)⊇1z(A∗RAA∗(z)A−1).R_{AA^*}(z) \supseteq \tfrac1z\big(A R_{A^*A}(z) A^* - 1\big), \qquad R_{A^*A}(z) \supseteq \tfrac1z\big(A^* R_{AA^*}(z) A - 1\big).RAA∗​(z)⊇z1​(ARA∗A​(z)A∗−1),RA∗A​(z)⊇z1​(A∗RAA∗​(z)A−1).

The last two milestones do not enter the goal. They are the chapter's other two theorems and use the same operator-theoretic layer.

Significance

Theorem 8.5 is the rigorous form of the most used exactly solvable model of quantum mechanics. Once it is available, the Hermite functions become an orthonormal basis of L2(R3)L^2(\mathbb R^3)L2(R3) that diagonalizes a concrete differential operator. That basis underlies Mehler's formula and the Fourier transform's action Fψn=(−i)nψn\mathcal F\psi_n = (-i)^n\psi_nFψn​=(−i)nψn​ (Eq. (8.46)). Perturbation arguments around the oscillator also start from it, and so does the construction of Fock space. The uncertainty principle is the basic quantitative constraint on simultaneous measurement. Theorem 8.6 gives an eigenvalue transfer mechanism that Teschl reuses to compute the hydrogen spectrum (Section 10.4).

Formally, the mission asks for a machine-checked proof about an unbounded differential operator on L2(R3)L^2(\mathbb R^3)L2(R3), stated on a concrete core. Mathlib has unbounded operators (LinearPMap, closure, adjoint), LpL^pLp spaces, Gaussian integrals and the probabilists' Hermite polynomials. It has no statement identifying the spectrum of a concrete Schrödinger operator. These results are proved in every textbook, but none of them has been formalized in this form.

Difficulty

The algebra of Eqs. (8.36)–(8.41) is a finite computation with polynomials times a Gaussian. The work in the goal is analytic. Essential self-adjointness is a statement about the closure of an operator on a non-closed domain. Symmetry of HHH together with a family of eigenvectors in Dω\mathfrak D_\omegaDω​ does not give it by definition, and the relevant criterion for unbounded operators is not in Mathlib. Completeness of the eigenfunctions in L2(R3)L^2(\mathbb R^3)L2(R3) is a density statement about a concrete function space (Lemma 8.3), and it has to be transferred from one dimension to three. The spectrum is asked for the closure H‾\overline HH, not for HHH on Dω\mathfrak D_\omegaDω​: the eigenvalues (2n+3)ω(2n+3)\omega(2n+3)ω are easy to exhibit, but showing that no other point of C\mathbb CC lies in σ(H‾)\sigma(\overline H)σ(H) requires control of (H‾−z)−1(\overline H - z)^{-1}(H−z)−1 on all of L2L^2L2. Finally, the Rodrigues formula (8.42) and the ladder construction (8.40) define the same functions only after an identity for all derivatives of e−x2e^{-x^2}e−x2.

Formalization scope

H\mathfrak HH is a complex inner product space with CompleteSpace; separability is not assumed, and no statement needs it. Operators are Mathlib LinearPMaps H →ₗ.[ℂ] H. A∗A^*A∗ is LinearPMap.adjoint, and every statement using it assumes a dense domain. Self-adjointness is Mathlib's IsSelfAdjoint, and essential self-adjointness is IsSelfAdjoint H.closure. ρ\rhoρ and σ\sigmaσ are defined in the mission for LinearPMaps (bounded two-sided inverse of A−zA - zA−z); Mathlib's Banach-algebra spectrum is not used. L2(Rn)L^2(\mathbb R^n)L2(Rn) is Lp ℂ 2 volume on EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). The Laplacian is the sum of second Fréchet derivatives along the unit vectors. Hermite polynomials are defined by the Rodrigues formula, not as Mathlib's probabilists' Polynomial.hermite. No projection-valued measure, functional calculus or Fourier transform is taken as data.

The oscillator is not defined as a construction. IsHarmonicOscillator ω H states that D(H)=Dω\mathfrak D(H) = \mathfrak D_\omegaD(H)=Dω​ and that HHH acts on a representative fff as −Δf+ω2∣x∣2f-\Delta f + \omega^2|x|^2 f−Δf+ω2∣x∣2f. This determines HHH uniquely, and the goal also asserts that such an HHH exists. Trivializing formalization ruled out: defining HHH as the diagonal operator ∑n(2∣n∣+3)ω⟨ψn,⋅⟩ψn\sum_n (2|n| + 3)\omega\langle\psi_n,\cdot\rangle\psi_n∑n​(2∣n∣+3)ω⟨ψn​,⋅⟩ψn​ would make the spectrum immediate. Here HHH is the differential operator on Dω\mathfrak D_\omegaDω​, and its eigenvalues must be derived.

Two choices differ from the printed text. First, Teschl's (8.34) writes the domain with e−x2/2e^{-x^2/2}e−x2/2, but his (8.39)–(8.41) and the conclusion span⁡{ψn}=D\operatorname{span}\{\psi_n\} = \mathfrak Dspan{ψn​}=D use e−ωx2/2e^{-\omega x^2/2}e−ωx2/2. The mission uses Dω\mathfrak D_\omegaDω​, which equals (8.34) for ω=1\omega = 1ω=1. Lemma 8.3 is stated for (8.20)'s D\mathfrak DD itself. Second, Theorem 8.6 prints "H1ψ1=ψ1H_1\psi_1 = \psi_1H1​ψ1​=ψ1​", and the mission states the intended H1ψ1=Eψ1H_1\psi_1 = E\psi_1H1​ψ1​=Eψ1​. The uncertainty principle adds ∥ψ∥=1\|\psi\| = 1∥ψ∥=1 explicitly; the book assumes it through its definition of a state.

Reusable pieces are the product of LinearPMaps, spectrum and resolvent for unbounded operators, the Gauss–polynomial core and its density, and the Hermite-function API. Contributions of general lemmas are welcome, for example "an operator with an orthonormal eigenbasis in its domain is essentially self-adjoint" and the spectrum of such an operator.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics, With Applications to Schrödinger Operators, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 99, AMS, 2009. bookstore.ams.org/gsm-99
  • H. P. Robertson, "The Uncertainty Principle", Physical Review 34 (1929), 163–164. doi:10.1103/PhysRev.34.163
  • W. Heisenberg, "Über den anschaulichen Inhalt der quantentheoretischen Kinematik und Mechanik", Zeitschrift für Physik 43 (1927), 172–198. doi:10.1007/BF01397280
15 thms3 active usersReviewed
Functional AnalysisMathematical Physics·Captain: mikedeng1

Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics VIII: Relatively Compact Perturbations and Weyl's TheoremTextbook

Motivation

In quantum mechanics the spectrum of a Hamiltonian splits into two parts that behave very differently under perturbation. Isolated eigenvalues of finite multiplicity (bound states) move, split or disappear when the operator is changed even slightly; the rest of the spectrum, which carries scattering states and accumulation points of eigenvalues, is far more rigid. Weyl's theorem makes this rigidity precise: if two self-adjoint operators have resolvents that differ by a compact operator, their essential spectra coincide. It is the standard first step in locating the spectrum of a Schrödinger operator −Δ+V-\Delta + V−Δ+V: one shows that VVV is a relatively compact perturbation of −Δ-\Delta−Δ, concludes σess(−Δ+V)=σess(−Δ)=[0,∞)\sigma_{ess}(-\Delta + V) = \sigma_{ess}(-\Delta) = [0,\infty)σess​(−Δ+V)=σess​(−Δ)=[0,∞), and is left with the discrete eigenvalues below zero.

The result goes back to H. Weyl's 1909 work on compact perturbations of bounded self-adjoint operators; the resolvent formulation for unbounded operators is the one used in modern texts such as Reed–Simon (Vol. IV, Sec. XIII.4) and Teschl's Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics (AMS GSM 99, 2009), Section 6.4, which this mission follows.

Setting

Let H\mathfrak HH be a complex Hilbert space and AAA a linear operator with domain D(A)⊆H\mathfrak D(A) \subseteq \mathfrak HD(A)⊆H. For z∈Cz \in \mathbb Cz∈C, the resolvent RA(z)=(A−z)−1R_A(z) = (A - z)^{-1}RA​(z)=(A−z)−1 exists when A−zA - zA−z maps D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A) bijectively onto H\mathfrak HH with a bounded inverse. The resolvent set ρ(A)\rho(A)ρ(A) is the set of such zzz, and the spectrum is σ(A)=C∖ρ(A)\sigma(A) = \mathbb C \setminus \rho(A)σ(A)=C∖ρ(A).

The discrete spectrum σd(A)\sigma_d(A)σd​(A) is the set of eigenvalues zzz of AAA that are isolated points of σ(A)\sigma(A)σ(A) and whose eigenspace Ker⁡(A−z)\operatorname{Ker}(A - z)Ker(A−z) is finite dimensional. The essential spectrum is σess(A)=σ(A)∖σd(A)\sigma_{ess}(A) = \sigma(A) \setminus \sigma_d(A)σess​(A)=σ(A)∖σd​(A).

A sequence ψn∈D(A)\psi_n \in \mathfrak D(A)ψn​∈D(A) with ∥ψn∥=1\|\psi_n\| = 1∥ψn​∥=1, ⟨φ,ψn⟩→0\langle \varphi, \psi_n \rangle \to 0⟨φ,ψn​⟩→0 for every φ\varphiφ (weak convergence to zero) and ∥(A−z)ψn∥→0\|(A - z)\psi_n\| \to 0∥(A−z)ψn​∥→0 is a singular Weyl sequence for AAA at zzz.

An operator is compact if it maps bounded sets to relatively compact sets; C(H)\mathfrak C(\mathfrak H)C(H) denotes the compact operators. An operator KKK is relatively compact with respect to AAA if D(A)⊆D(K)\mathfrak D(A) \subseteq \mathfrak D(K)D(A)⊆D(K) and KRA(z)∈C(H)K R_A(z) \in \mathfrak C(\mathfrak H)KRA​(z)∈C(H) for one z∈ρ(A)z \in \rho(A)z∈ρ(A). BBB is AAA bounded if D(A)⊆D(B)\mathfrak D(A) \subseteq \mathfrak D(B)D(A)⊆D(B) and ∥Bψ∥≤a∥Aψ∥+b∥ψ∥\|B\psi\| \le a\|A\psi\| + b\|\psi\|∥Bψ∥≤a∥Aψ∥+b∥ψ∥ on D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A); the infimum of admissible aaa is the AAA-bound. A symmetric operator AAA has defect indices d±(A)=dim⁡Ran⁡(A±i)⊥d_\pm(A) = \dim \operatorname{Ran}(A \pm i)^\perpd±​(A)=dimRan(A±i)⊥.

Formalization targets

Goal: Weyl's theorem (Theorem 6.19)

For self-adjoint AAA and BBB,

∃ z∈ρ(A)∩ρ(B): RA(z)−RB(z)∈C(H)⟹σess(A)=σess(B).\exists\, z \in \rho(A) \cap \rho(B):\ R_A(z) - R_B(z) \in \mathfrak C(\mathfrak H) \quad\Longrightarrow\quad \sigma_{ess}(A) = \sigma_{ess}(B).∃z∈ρ(A)∩ρ(B): RA​(z)−RB​(z)∈C(H)⟹σess​(A)=σess​(B).

Milestones

  • Weyl criterion (Lemma 6.17). For self-adjoint AAA: z∈σess(A)z \in \sigma_{ess}(A)z∈σess​(A) if and only if a singular Weyl sequence at zzz exists; if so, it can be chosen orthonormal.
  • Compact perturbations (Lemma 6.18). For self-adjoint AAA and compact self-adjoint KKK, σess(A+K)=σess(A)\sigma_{ess}(A + K) = \sigma_{ess}(A)σess​(A+K)=σess​(A), and
σess(A)=⋂K∈C(H), K∗=Kσ(A+K).\sigma_{ess}(A) = \bigcap_{K \in \mathfrak C(\mathfrak H),\, K^* = K} \sigma(A + K).σess​(A)=K∈C(H),K∗=K⋂​σ(A+K).
  • Independence of zzz (Lemma 6.21, first part). If RA(z)−RB(z)R_A(z) - R_B(z)RA​(z)−RB​(z) is compact for one z∈ρ(A)∩ρ(B)z \in \rho(A) \cap \rho(B)z∈ρ(A)∩ρ(B), it is compact for all such zzz.
  • Self-adjoint extensions (Theorem 6.20). If AAA is symmetric with d+(A)=d−(A)<∞d_+(A) = d_-(A) < \inftyd+​(A)=d−​(A)<∞, all self-adjoint extensions of AAA have the same essential spectrum.
  • Relative compactness is infinitesimal (Lemma 6.22). For self-adjoint AAA, a relatively compact KKK has AAA-bound 000.
  • Stability of relative compactness (Lemma 6.23). If AAA is self-adjoint, BBB symmetric with AAA-bound less than one, and KKK relatively compact with respect to AAA, then KKK is relatively compact with respect to A+BA + BA+B.

Significance

The result. Weyl's theorem reduces the determination of the essential spectrum of a perturbed operator to that of a simpler reference operator. Combined with Lemma 6.22 and the Kato–Rellich theorem, it yields σess(A+K)=σess(A)\sigma_{ess}(A + K) = \sigma_{ess}(A)σess​(A+K)=σess​(A) for every relatively compact symmetric KKK; Lemma 6.23 extends this to perturbations of the form B+KB + KB+K. These are the inputs to the HVZ theorem for NNN-body systems, to the spectral analysis of one-particle Schrödinger operators with decaying potentials, and, via Theorem 6.20, to the observation that boundary conditions at a limit-circle endpoint do not affect the essential spectrum of a Sturm–Liouville operator. The Weyl criterion is independently useful: it is how points are shown to lie in σess\sigma_{ess}σess​ in concrete examples.

Formalizing it. The results are classical and proved in every text on the subject. None of them is formalized: Mathlib has compact operators and the adjoint of a densely defined LinearPMap, but no resolvent set or spectrum for unbounded operators, no discrete or essential spectrum and no relative compactness. This mission asks for formal proofs of Teschl's statements and, with them, a reusable layer of definitions (resolvent of a LinearPMap, σd\sigma_dσd​, σess\sigma_{ess}σess​, singular Weyl sequences, relative compactness) on which later chapters (free Schrödinger operator, HVZ theorem) can build.

Difficulty

The obvious route to all of these statements goes through the spectral theorem: Teschl's proof of the Weyl criterion uses spectral projections PA((λ−ε,λ+ε))P_A((\lambda - \varepsilon, \lambda + \varepsilon))PA​((λ−ε,λ+ε)) and spectral measures μψn\mu_{\psi_n}μψn​​, and his characterization (6.27)–(6.28) of σess\sigma_{ess}σess​ by ranks of spectral projections presupposes the functional calculus. Mathlib has no spectral theorem for unbounded self-adjoint operators, so this route requires either building it or finding arguments that avoid it. The definition of σess\sigma_{ess}σess​ used here is deliberately the PVM-free one of p. 145, which makes the statements expressible now but moves the difficulty into the proofs: showing that a point of σ(A)∖σd(A)\sigma(A) \setminus \sigma_d(A)σ(A)∖σd​(A) carries a singular Weyl sequence requires controlling approximate eigenvectors near a non-isolated spectral point or an eigenvalue of infinite multiplicity without projections.

A second difficulty is domain bookkeeping. A+KA + KA+K, A+BA + BA+B, KRA(z)K R_A(z)KRA​(z) and RA+B(z)R_{A+B}(z)RA+B​(z) all involve unbounded operators with different domains, and identities such as the second resolvent formula KRA+B(z)=KRA(z)(I−BRA+B(z))K R_{A+B}(z) = K R_A(z)(\mathbb I - B R_{A+B}(z))KRA+B​(z)=KRA​(z)(I−BRA+B​(z)) must be established on the correct domains. Theorem 6.20 requires relating the resolvents of two self-adjoint extensions through the finite-dimensional defect spaces.

Formalization scope

The Hilbert space is {H : Type*} [NormedAddCommGroup H] [InnerProductSpace ℂ H] [CompleteSpace H]; separability is not assumed, since no statement of the section needs it. Unbounded operators are Mathlib LinearPMaps H →ₗ.[ℂ] H, self-adjointness is Mathlib's IsSelfAdjoint (which implies a dense domain), and symmetric operators are densely defined by definition, as in the book. The resolvent is the bounded two-sided inverse of A−zA - zA−z of p. 73 (IsResolventAt), and ρ(A)\rho(A)ρ(A), σ(A)\sigma(A)σ(A) are defined from it; Mathlib's Banach-algebra spectrum is not used. "For one z∈ρ(A)∩ρ(B)z \in \rho(A) \cap \rho(B)z∈ρ(A)∩ρ(B)" is an existential over zzz and the two resolvents. Compactness is Mathlib's IsCompactOperator, which on a Hilbert space agrees with the book's norm closure of finite rank operators. A+KA + KA+K for bounded KKK is K +ᵥ A (domain D(A)\mathfrak D(A)D(A)); A+BA + BA+B for unbounded BBB is the LinearPMap sum with domain D(A)∩D(B)\mathfrak D(A) \cap \mathfrak D(B)D(A)∩D(B). The AAA-bound is valued in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] and is ∞\infty∞ for an operator that is not AAA bounded. The defect indices are "equal and finite" when both defect spaces are finite dimensional with equal finrank.

No projection-valued measure or functional calculus is taken as data, and none is needed: every statement is phrased without f(A)f(A)f(A). For this reason the second half of Lemma 6.21, f(A)−f(B)∈C(H)f(A) - f(B) \in \mathfrak C(\mathfrak H)f(A)−f(B)∈C(H) for f∈C∞(R)f \in C_\infty(\mathbb R)f∈C∞​(R), and the form-compactness results Lemma 6.26 and Corollary 6.27 of Section 6.5 are not part of the mission.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the discrete spectrum requires all three of "eigenvalue", "isolated in σ(A)\sigma(A)σ(A)" and "finite-dimensional eigenspace", so σess\sigma_{ess}σess​ is neither empty nor all of σ(A)\sigma(A)σ(A) by definition, and the resolvent hypothesis of Weyl's theorem is an existential over genuine resolvents, never a junk value outside ρ(A)\rho(A)ρ(A).

A complete development needs the resolvent identities for LinearPMaps, the relation between self-adjointness and real spectrum, weak convergence of bounded sequences, and the fact that compact operators map weakly null sequences to norm-null ones. The definitions of resolvent, σess\sigma_{ess}σess​, relative compactness and AAA-bound are shared with other chapters of this series and are intended for reuse. Contributions of general lemmas on LinearPMap resolvents are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Mathematical Methods in Quantum Mechanics, With Applications to Schrödinger Operators, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 99, AMS, 2009, Section 6.4. https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/099
  • H. Weyl, Über beschränkte quadratische Formen, deren Differenz vollstetig ist, Rendiconti del Circolo Matematico di Palermo 27 (1909), 373–392. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF03019655
  • M. Reed and B. Simon, Methods of Modern Mathematical Physics IV: Analysis of Operators, Academic Press, 1978, Section XIII.4.
  • T. Kato, Perturbation Theory for Linear Operators, 2nd ed., Springer, 1980, Section IV.5. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-66282-9
14 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Dynamical Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems IX: Interval Maps, Symbolic Dynamics and the Tent-Map RepellorTextbook

Motivation

One-dimensional maps are the smallest systems in which deterministic dynamics becomes unpredictable. Chapter 11 of Gerald Teschl's graduate text Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (author's version; AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, 2012, doi:10.1090/gsm/140) uses them to make the word "chaos" precise. The chapter proves that a period-three orbit of a continuous interval map forces orbits of every period (Li and Yorke, 1975, the first case of Sarkovskii's theorem), adopts Devaney's topological definition of chaos, codes the tent map by sequences of two symbols, and ends by computing the Hausdorff dimension of the tent map's invariant Cantor set. The same pattern (a Cantor set, a conjugacy to a shift, a fractal dimension) returns in the Smale horseshoe of Chapter 13 and in hyperbolic dynamics generally, so the chapter is the standard entry point to symbolic dynamics.

Setting

For a real parameter μ\muμ the tent map is Tμ(x)=μ2(1−∣2x−1∣)T_\mu(x) = \frac{\mu}{2}(1 - |2x-1|)Tμ​(x)=2μ​(1−∣2x−1∣), a map of the real line. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2 the peak μ/2\mu/2μ/2 exceeds 111, points leave [0,1][0,1][0,1] and then escape to −∞-\infty−∞. The repellor of the tent map is the set of points that never leave,

Λ={ x∈R:Tμn(x)∈[0,1] for all n≥0 },\Lambda = \{\, x \in \mathbb{R} : T_\mu^n(x) \in [0,1] \text{ for all } n \ge 0 \,\},Λ={x∈R:Tμn​(x)∈[0,1] for all n≥0},

which the book builds as a nested intersection of 2n2^n2n intervals of length μ−n\mu^{-n}μ−n; for μ=2\mu = 2μ=2 it is all of [0,1][0,1][0,1]. With I0=[0,μ−1]I_0 = [0, \mu^{-1}]I0​=[0,μ−1] and I1=[1−μ−1,1]I_1 = [1-\mu^{-1}, 1]I1​=[1−μ−1,1], the itinerary map φ\varphiφ sends x∈Λx \in \Lambdax∈Λ to the sequence (xn)n≥0(x_n)_{n \ge 0}(xn​)n≥0​ with xn=jx_n = jxn​=j when Tμn(x)∈IjT_\mu^n(x) \in I_jTμn​(x)∈Ij​.

The sequence space ΣN={0,…,N−1}N0\Sigma_N = \{0, \dots, N-1\}^{\mathbb{N}_0}ΣN​={0,…,N−1}N0​, N≥2N \ge 2N≥2, carries the metric d(x,y)=∑n≥0∣xn−yn∣/Nnd(x,y) = \sum_{n \ge 0} |x_n - y_n| / N^nd(x,y)=∑n≥0​∣xn​−yn​∣/Nn and the shift σ(x0,x1,… )=(x1,x2,… )\sigma(x_0, x_1, \dots) = (x_1, x_2, \dots)σ(x0​,x1​,…)=(x1​,x2​,…).

A continuous map f:M→Mf : M \to Mf:M→M of a metric space is topologically transitive if for all nonempty open U,VU, VU,V some iterate fn(U)f^n(U)fn(U), n≥1n \ge 1n≥1, meets VVV. It is chaotic if in addition MMM is infinite and the periodic points of fff are dense. This is the definition used in the book, and it has no sensitivity clause. It has sensitive dependence on initial conditions if some δ>0\delta > 0δ>0 has the property that every xxx has points yyy arbitrarily close to it with d(fn(x),fn(y))>δd(f^n(x), f^n(y)) > \deltad(fn(x),fn(y))>δ for some n≥1n \ge 1n≥1. A compact set Λ\LambdaΛ with f(Λ)=Λf(\Lambda) = \Lambdaf(Λ)=Λ is repelling if some neighborhood UUU of Λ\LambdaΛ is eventually left by every orbit starting in U∖ΛU \setminus \LambdaU∖Λ. A repelling set is a repellor if (Λ,f∣Λ)(\Lambda, f|_\Lambda)(Λ,f∣Λ​) is transitive. It is a strange repellor if moreover (Λ,f∣Λ)(\Lambda, f|_\Lambda)(Λ,f∣Λ​) is chaotic and Λ\LambdaΛ is fractal, meaning its Hausdorff dimension dim⁡H\dim_HdimH​ is not an integer. A Cantor set is a compact, totally disconnected, perfect set.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 11.20

dim⁡H(Λ)=log⁡2log⁡μ(μ≥2),and for μ>2, Λ is a strange repellor of Tμ.\dim_H(\Lambda) = \frac{\log 2}{\log \mu} \quad (\mu \ge 2), \qquad \text{and for } \mu > 2,\ \Lambda \text{ is a strange repellor of } T_\mu .dimH​(Λ)=logμlog2​(μ≥2),and for μ>2, Λ is a strange repellor of Tμ​.

The book states the strange-repellor clause for μ≥2\mu \ge 2μ≥2. At μ=2\mu = 2μ=2, however, Λ=[0,1]\Lambda = [0,1]Λ=[0,1] has dimension 111, which is an integer, so the goal restricts that clause to μ>2\mu > 2μ>2.

Milestones

  • Lemma 11.1. A continuous f:[a,b]→[a,b]f : [a,b] \to [a,b]f:[a,b]→[a,b] with a point of prime period 333 has points of every prime period n≥1n \ge 1n≥1.
  • Lemma 11.3. A chaotic map has sensitive dependence on initial conditions.
  • Lemma 11.6. On ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​: d(x,y)≤N−nd(x,y) \le N^{-n}d(x,y)≤N−n if xj=yjx_j = y_jxj​=yj​ for all j≤nj \le nj≤n, and d(x,y)≥N−nd(x,y) \ge N^{-n}d(x,y)≥N−n if xj≠yjx_j \ne y_jxj​=yj​ for some j≤nj \le nj≤n.
  • Lemma 11.8. The periodic points of σ\sigmaσ on ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​ are countable and dense.
  • Lemma 11.9. The shift on ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​ has a dense forward orbit.
  • Lemma 11.4. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2, Λ\LambdaΛ is a Cantor set.
  • Theorem 11.5. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2, φ\varphiφ is a homeomorphism of Λ\LambdaΛ onto Σ2\Sigma_2Σ2​ with σ∘φ=φ∘Tμ\sigma \circ \varphi = \varphi \circ T_\muσ∘φ=φ∘Tμ​ on Λ\LambdaΛ.

Significance

The dimension formula is the simplest non-trivial instance of the principle that the Hausdorff dimension of an expanding repellor is determined by the number of branches and the expansion rate. For conformal repellors this principle becomes Bowen's formula. Theorem 11.23 of the same chapter extends the bound to general two-branch expanding interval maps, with log⁡2/log⁡β≤dim⁡HΛ≤log⁡2/log⁡α\log 2/\log\beta \le \dim_H \Lambda \le \log 2/\log\alphalog2/logβ≤dimH​Λ≤log2/logα. The conjugacy with the full shift is the device that reduces the dynamics on Λ\LambdaΛ to combinatorics of sequences. It is reused verbatim for the horseshoe.

On formalization: Mathlib has Hausdorff measure and dimension (MeasureTheory.Measure.hausdorffMeasure, dimH) together with Hölder and Lipschitz image bounds. It has no dimension computation for a self-similar Cantor set and no symbolic-dynamics layer. On Prove2Me, the Devaney series proves period three implies all periods and Sarkovskii's theorem for continuous maps R→R\mathbb{R} \to \mathbb{R}R→R, the density of periodic points and a dense orbit for the two-symbol shift, and a Cantor-set statement for the quadratic family. None of these states the results for self-maps of a compact interval, for NNN symbols, or for the tent map, and none computes a Hausdorff dimension. All results here are proved in the book, except that the proof of Theorem 11.20 is terse. None is formalized in the form stated here.

Difficulty

The upper bound dim⁡HΛ≤log⁡2/log⁡μ\dim_H \Lambda \le \log 2/\log\mudimH​Λ≤log2/logμ comes from the natural covers. The lower bound is the hard direction: it has to hold for every cover, including covers by sets of very different sizes that do not line up with the 2n2^n2n construction intervals. So the natural covers alone do not decide it. Counting the construction intervals that an arbitrary set of a given diameter can meet needs the gaps between them to be controlled uniformly. The heuristic self-similarity identity hα(Λ)=2μ−αhα(Λ)h^\alpha(\Lambda) = 2\mu^{-\alpha} h^\alpha(\Lambda)hα(Λ)=2μ−αhα(Λ) fixes α\alphaα only once 0<hα(Λ)<∞0 < h^\alpha(\Lambda) < \infty0<hα(Λ)<∞ is known, and that is exactly what has to be proved. For the strange-repellor clause, every part of the definition (repelling, transitive, infinite, dense periodic points, fractal) has to be checked for (Λ,Tμ∣Λ)(\Lambda, T_\mu|_\Lambda)(Λ,Tμ​∣Λ​) with the subspace topology. Transferring transitivity and density of periodic points from Σ2\Sigma_2Σ2​ requires the homeomorphism of Theorem 11.5 in both directions, not just a continuous surjection. In Lemma 11.1 the difficulty is showing that the periodic point found has prime period nnn, not a divisor of nnn.

Formalization scope

Everything is stated in namespace TeschlODE.IntervalMaps against Mathlib.

  • The tent map is a total function R→R\mathbb{R} \to \mathbb{R}R→R, and Λ\LambdaΛ is defined as the set of points whose orbit stays in [0,1][0,1][0,1], uniformly in μ\muμ. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2 this is the book's ⋂nΛn\bigcap_n \Lambda_n⋂n​Λn​ (11.18).
  • ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​ is ℕ → Fin N, and the metric (11.28) is a function symDist N (a tsum, summable for N≥2N \ge 2N≥2). Density and continuity on ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​ are stated in explicit ε\varepsilonε–δ\deltaδ form with this function. Each theorem assumes N≥2N \ge 2N≥2, the book's N∈N∖{1}N \in \mathbb{N}\setminus\{1\}N∈N∖{1}.
  • The itinerary map is ℝ → (ℕ → Fin 2). Its values off Λ\LambdaΛ are meaningless and never used. "Homeomorphism" in Theorem 11.5 means: φ\varphiφ is a bijection of Λ\LambdaΛ onto Σ2\Sigma_2Σ2​, it is continuous on Λ\LambdaΛ, and its inverse is continuous, all in metric form.
  • Chaos, transitivity, repelling sets, repellors and strange repellors are predicates on a map of a metric space. The restricted system (Λ,f∣Λ)(\Lambda, f|_\Lambda)(Λ,f∣Λ​) uses the subspace topology. Transitivity quantifies over nonempty open sets and iterates n≥1n \ge 1n≥1. Periodic points are Function.periodicPts, and the prime period in Lemma 11.1 is Function.minimalPeriod on the subtype [a,b][a,b][a,b].
  • dim⁡H\dim_HdimH​ is Mathlib's dimH, valued in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. "Not an integer" means finite and different from every natural number. The goal's right-hand side is ENNReal.ofReal (log 2 / log μ).

There are no "sufficiently small" or O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) readings in this chapter. The only quantifier choices are the explicit ε\varepsilonε–δ\deltaδ forms above and the nonempty open sets in transitivity.

The goal is not a dimension-only statement. For μ>2\mu > 2μ>2, a statement that proved only (11.49), or that restricted to a single value such as μ=3\mu = 3μ=3, would be a different and weaker theorem. The full strange-repellor conclusion, with every clause of the definition, is required. Solvers can reuse the symbolic-dynamics lemmas (11.6, 11.8, 11.9) and the conjugacy (11.5). General Mathlib contributions on ΣN\Sigma_NΣN​ as a metric space are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, 2012. Author's version: https://www.mat.univie.ac.at/~gerald/ftp/book-ode/ode.pdf ; https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/140
  • R. L. Devaney, An Introduction to Chaotic Dynamical Systems, 2nd ed., Addison-Wesley, 1989 (book; no DOI).
  • T.-Y. Li and J. A. Yorke, "Period three implies chaos", American Mathematical Monthly 82 (1975), 985–992. https://doi.org/10.2307/2318254
  • K. Falconer, Fractal Geometry: Mathematical Foundations and Applications, Wiley, 1990 (book; no DOI for the first edition).
  • C. Robinson, Dynamical Systems: Stability, Symbolic Dynamics, and Chaos, 2nd ed., CRC Press, 1999 (book).
21 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Dynamical Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems VI: The Poincaré–Bendixson TheoremTextbook

Motivation

Long-time behaviour is the central question about an autonomous differential equation x˙=f(x)\dot x = f(x)x˙=f(x): where does a trajectory go as t→±∞t \to \pm\inftyt→±∞? In the plane this question has an almost complete answer. The theory begun by Poincaré (Mémoire sur les courbes définies par une équation différentielle, 1881–1886) and completed by Bendixson (Sur les courbes définies par des équations différentielles, Acta Math. 24, 1901, doi:10.1007/BF02403068) shows that a bounded planar trajectory can only accumulate on equilibria, on a periodic orbit, or on a chain of equilibria joined by connecting orbits. Chaotic behaviour, which already occurs for three-dimensional flows such as the Lorenz system, is excluded. It is the standard tool for proving that a planar system has a limit cycle, and it underlies Hilbert's 16th problem.

This mission formalizes Section 7.3 of G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (author's preliminary version of AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, 2012), pp. 220–224, which proves the classical theorem and the generalized version with finitely many fixed points.

Setting

Let M⊆R2M \subseteq \mathbb{R}^2M⊆R2 be open and f∈C1(M,R2)f \in C^1(M, \mathbb{R}^2)f∈C1(M,R2). An integral curve at xxx is a function φ\varphiφ on an open interval J∋0J \ni 0J∋0 with φ(0)=x\varphi(0) = xφ(0)=x, φ(J)⊆M\varphi(J) \subseteq Mφ(J)⊆M and φ˙(s)=f(φ(s))\dot\varphi(s) = f(\varphi(s))φ˙​(s)=f(φ(s)) on JJJ. The union of all such JJJ is the maximal interval Ix=(T−(x),T+(x))I_x = (T_-(x), T_+(x))Ix​=(T−​(x),T+​(x)). The flow Φ(t,x)\Phi(t, x)Φ(t,x), t∈Ixt \in I_xt∈Ix​, is the value at time ttt of the maximal integral curve at xxx. With σ∈{+,−}\sigma \in \{+,-\}σ∈{+,−}:

  • the orbit is γ(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix}\gamma(x) = \{\Phi(t,x) : t \in I_x\}γ(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix​}, and the half-orbit γσ(x)\gamma_\sigma(x)γσ​(x) keeps only t∈Ixt \in I_xt∈Ix​ with σt>0\sigma t > 0σt>0;
  • a fixed point is a point with f(x)=0f(x) = 0f(x)=0; a periodic point is a point with Φ(T,x)=x\Phi(T, x) = xΦ(T,x)=x for some T>0T > 0T>0 in IxI_xIx​ (fixed points included). A regular periodic orbit is the orbit of a periodic point that is not fixed, and a non-closed orbit is the orbit of a point that is not periodic;
  • the ωσ\omega_\sigmaωσ​-limit set ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) is the set of y∈My \in My∈M with Φ(tk,x)→y\Phi(t_k, x) \to yΦ(tk​,x)→y for some times tk∈Ixt_k \in I_xtk​∈Ix​, tk→σ∞t_k \to \sigma\inftytk​→σ∞;
  • a set U⊆MU \subseteq MU⊆M is σ\sigmaσ invariant if γσ(x)⊆U\gamma_\sigma(x) \subseteq Uγσ​(x)⊆U for every x∈Ux \in Ux∈U;
  • a transversal arc Σ=s(J)\Sigma = s(J)Σ=s(J) is the image of a C1C^1C1 embedding sss of an open interval JJJ into MMM with s˙≠0\dot s \ne 0s˙=0 and s˙1f2(s)−s˙2f1(s)≠0\dot s_1 f_2(s) - \dot s_2 f_1(s) \neq 0s˙1​f2​(s)−s˙2​f1​(s)=0 on JJJ. The parameter orders the points of Σ\SigmaΣ.

In Lean, points are Fin 2 → ℝ (general Fin n → ℝ for the Chapter 6 notions), and σ\sigmaσ is a Bool with true for +++. The definitions are lifetime, flow, orbit, halfOrbit, omegaLimitSet, IsPeriodicPoint and IsTransversalArc, all in the namespace TeschlODE.Planar.

Formalization targets

Goal: the generalized Poincaré–Bendixson theorem (Theorem 7.16)

Fix x∈Mx \in Mx∈M and σ\sigmaσ, and suppose ωσ(x)≠∅\omega_\sigma(x) \neq \emptysetωσ​(x)=∅ is compact, connected and contains only finitely many fixed points. Then one of three cases holds:

(i) ωσ(x)={x0}, f(x0)=0;(ii) ωσ(x)=γ(y), y periodic, f(y)≠0;\text{(i) } \omega_\sigma(x) = \{x_0\},\ f(x_0) = 0; \qquad \text{(ii) } \omega_\sigma(x) = \gamma(y),\ y \text{ periodic},\ f(y) \neq 0;(i) ωσ​(x)={x0​}, f(x0​)=0;(ii) ωσ​(x)=γ(y), y periodic, f(y)=0; (iii) every y∈ωσ(x) with f(y)≠0 lies on a non-closed orbit γ(y)⊆ωσ(x) with ω+(y)={a}, ω−(y)={b},\text{(iii) every } y \in \omega_\sigma(x) \text{ with } f(y) \ne 0 \text{ lies on a non-closed orbit } \gamma(y) \subseteq \omega_\sigma(x) \text{ with } \omega_+(y) = \{a\},\ \omega_-(y) = \{b\},(iii) every y∈ωσ​(x) with f(y)=0 lies on a non-closed orbit γ(y)⊆ωσ​(x) with ω+​(y)={a}, ω−​(y)={b},

where a,ba, ba,b are fixed points in ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x).

Milestones

  1. Lemma 7.9. The successive intersections of γσ(x0)\gamma_\sigma(x_0)γσ​(x0​) with a transversal arc through a regular point x0x_0x0​ are monotone along the arc.
  2. Corollary 7.10. ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) meets a transversal arc in at most one point.
  3. Corollary 7.11. If ωσ(x)∩γσ(x)≠∅\omega_\sigma(x) \cap \gamma_\sigma(x) \neq \emptysetωσ​(x)∩γσ​(x)=∅, then xxx is periodic and ω+(x)=ω−(x)=γ(x)\omega_+(x) = \omega_-(x) = \gamma(x)ω+​(x)=ω−​(x)=γ(x).
  4. Corollary 7.12. A minimal compact σ\sigmaσ invariant set is a periodic orbit.
  5. Lemma 7.13 (Poincaré–Bendixson). A nonempty compact ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) without fixed points is a regular periodic orbit.
  6. Lemma 7.14. A connected ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) that contains a regular periodic orbit γ(y)\gamma(y)γ(y) equals γ(y)\gamma(y)γ(y).
  7. Lemma 7.15. If ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) is compact, at most one orbit in ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) runs from a fixed point x−x_-x−​ to a distinct fixed point x+x_+x+​.

Significance

The theorem turns the existence of periodic solutions into a topological statement. It is enough to find a compact positively invariant region with no equilibria, often an annulus bounded by two curves on which the vector field points inward. This is how periodic orbits are established for the van der Pol and Liénard equations (Theorem 7.8 of the same chapter) and for many models in biology and chemistry. The generalized version also describes limit sets that contain equilibria, such as homoclinic and heteroclinic cycles. Corollary 7.12 records the dimensional boundary: in the plane every minimal set is a periodic orbit, while from dimension three on minimal sets can be invariant tori with dense orbits.

The results have been proved for over a century. None of them is formalized in Mathlib or on the platform. Mathlib has omegaLimit for global flows on topological spaces and existence and uniqueness of integral curves, but no local flow of a vector field on an open set, no transversal sections and no Jordan curve theorem. This mission produces a machine-checked planar limit-set theory. The local flow and limit-set layer it needs is reusable for every later chapter on dynamical systems.

Difficulty

The statements are topological, and the proofs rest on the Jordan curve theorem for piecewise C1C^1C1 curves: a closed curve made of an orbit segment and a piece of transversal arc separates the plane, and trajectories cannot cross it in the forbidden direction. That theorem is not in Mathlib, and the platform's Jordan-curve and Schoenflies statements are open. Everything that looks one-dimensional in a sketch, "the orbit enters the inside and is trapped", depends on it. The ingredients a sketch treats as obvious also need care: the flow-box straightening (Lemma 6.2), the local return map to a transversal arc (Lemma 6.9), and the invariance, closedness and connectedness of limit sets (Lemmas 6.5–6.6). Generic arguments about compact invariant sets do not suffice: the conclusions are false in R3\mathbb{R}^3R3, so any proof must use planarity.

Formalization scope

  • Points are Fin 2 → ℝ. Its sup norm induces the Euclidean topology, and no statement depends on the norm. fff is a total function with ContDiffOn ℝ 1 f M on the open set MMM.
  • The flow is defined, not assumed. lifetime f M x is the union of domains of integral curves at xxx, and flow f M t x is the value at ttt of such a curve, selected by choice (unique for C1C^1C1 fields). Outside IxI_xIx​ the flow has the junk value xxx, and no statement evaluates it there. Limit points must lie in MMM, as in the book.
  • σ∈{±}\sigma \in \{\pm\}σ∈{±} is a Bool; true means +++ (atTop), false means −-− (atBot).
  • "Periodic" includes fixed points (period zero), as in the book. "Regular periodic" is periodic with f(y)≠0f(y) \neq 0f(y)=0, and "non-closed" is not periodic.
  • A transversal arc is a C1C^1C1 topological embedding of an open interval into MMM. The book says "smooth", so these statements cover a wider class of arcs and are at least as strong as the book's. Lemma 7.9's "monotone sequence of intersections" is stated as: any parametrization uuu of the intersection points (s(u(t))=Φ(t,x0)s(u(t)) = \Phi(t, x_0)s(u(t))=Φ(t,x0​)) is monotone or antitone on the set of intersection times.
  • "Connected" is IsPreconnected; nonemptiness is a separate hypothesis. "Finitely many fixed points" is Set.Finite {y ∈ ω_σ(x) | f y = 0}. The book's "ω±(y)∈{xj}\omega_\pm(y) \in \{x_j\}ω±​(y)∈{xj​}" is ω±(y)={a}\omega_\pm(y) = \{a\}ω±​(y)={a} for a fixed point a∈ωσ(x)a \in \omega_\sigma(x)a∈ωσ​(x). No statement uses O(·), "sufficiently small" or an unspecified constant.
  • The four hypotheses on ωσ(x)\omega_\sigma(x)ωσ​(x) (nonempty, compact, connected, finitely many fixed points) are the book's and are all kept. A formalization that drops one of them, or reads "regular periodic orbit" to include a fixed point, is not the theorem.
  • Needed infrastructure: local existence, uniqueness and continuity of the flow (Chapter 2, 6.1), the flow box, the Jordan curve theorem for piecewise C1C^1C1 curves, and the basic limit-set lemmas of Chapter 6. Contributions of any of these as separate lemmas are welcome, and the Jordan curve theorem in particular is reusable far beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, AMS, 2012 (author's preliminary version, §7.3). doi:10.1090/gsm/140, author's copy
  • I. Bendixson, Sur les courbes définies par des équations différentielles, Acta Mathematica 24 (1901), 1–88. doi:10.1007/BF02403068
  • M. W. Hirsch, S. Smale, R. L. Devaney, Differential Equations, Dynamical Systems, and an Introduction to Chaos, 3rd ed., Academic Press, 2013, Ch. 10. doi:10.1016/C2009-0-61160-0
  • L. Perko, Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, 3rd ed., Springer, 2001, §3.7. doi:10.1007/978-1-4613-0003-8
16 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Control TheoryDynamical Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems V: Limit Sets and the Krasovskii–LaSalle PrincipleTextbook

Motivation

Most differential equations that model physical, biological or engineered systems cannot be solved in closed form, yet the question asked about them is usually qualitative: does the system settle down to an equilibrium, and does it stay near the equilibrium when perturbed? Liapunov's direct method answers that question without solving the equation, by exhibiting a function that does not increase along solutions. It is the standard tool of nonlinear stability analysis and of control design, where a controller is typically certified by a Liapunov function for the closed-loop system (Khalil, Nonlinear Systems).

A Liapunov function whose values strictly decrease along every non-constant solution gives asymptotic stability directly. In practice the natural candidate, often the total energy of a damped mechanical system, only satisfies a non-strict inequality. The Krasovskii–LaSalle invariance principle closes that gap: if the function is not constant along any complete orbit other than the equilibrium, the equilibrium is still asymptotically stable. It was established by Barbashin and Krasovskii (1952) and by LaSalle (1960, IRE Trans. Circuit Theory 7).

This mission formalizes Chapter 6 of Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, 2012; author's preliminary version), from the local flow of an autonomous equation, through limit sets, to the principle itself.

Setting

Fix n∈Nn \in \mathbb{N}n∈N, an open set M⊆RnM \subseteq \mathbb{R}^nM⊆Rn (the phase space) and a vector field f:M→Rnf : M \to \mathbb{R}^nf:M→Rn of class C1C^1C1. The autonomous system is x˙=f(x)\dot x = f(x)x˙=f(x). An integral curve is a differentiable map φ\varphiφ from an open interval JJJ into MMM with φ˙(t)=f(φ(t))\dot\varphi(t) = f(\varphi(t))φ˙​(t)=f(φ(t)) for all t∈Jt \in Jt∈J.

For each x∈Mx \in Mx∈M there is a maximal interval Ix=(T−(x),T+(x))∋0I_x = (T_-(x), T_+(x)) \ni 0Ix​=(T−​(x),T+​(x))∋0 and a unique maximal integral curve t↦Φ(t,x)t \mapsto \Phi(t, x)t↦Φ(t,x) on IxI_xIx​ with Φ(0,x)=x\Phi(0, x) = xΦ(0,x)=x: every integral curve through xxx at time 000 is a restriction of it. The map Φ\PhiΦ on W={(t,x):x∈M, t∈Ix}W = \{(t, x) : x \in M,\ t \in I_x\}W={(t,x):x∈M, t∈Ix​} is the flow. It is a local flow: IxI_xIx​ may be bounded, because solutions can leave MMM or blow up in finite time.

The orbit of xxx is γ(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix}\gamma(x) = \{\Phi(t, x) : t \in I_x\}γ(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix​} and the forward orbit is γ+(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix, t>0}\gamma_+(x) = \{\Phi(t, x) : t \in I_x,\ t > 0\}γ+​(x)={Φ(t,x):t∈Ix​, t>0} (γ−(x)\gamma_-(x)γ−​(x) with t<0t < 0t<0). The ω+\omega_+ω+​-limit set ω+(x)\omega_+(x)ω+​(x) is the set of y∈My \in My∈M with Φ(tk,x)→y\Phi(t_k, x) \to yΦ(tk​,x)→y for some times tk→+∞t_k \to +\inftytk​→+∞ in IxI_xIx​; ω−(x)\omega_-(x)ω−​(x) uses tk→−∞t_k \to -\inftytk​→−∞.

A point x0∈Mx_0 \in Mx0​∈M with f(x0)=0f(x_0) = 0f(x0​)=0 is a fixed point. It is stable if every neighborhood U′U'U′ of x0x_0x0​ contains a neighborhood VVV of x0x_0x0​ such that solutions starting in VVV exist and stay in U′U'U′ for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0. It is asymptotically stable if moreover Φ(t,x)→x0\Phi(t, x) \to x_0Φ(t,x)→x0​ as t→∞t \to \inftyt→∞ for all xxx in some neighborhood of x0x_0x0​.

A Liapunov function at x0x_0x0​ is a continuous L:U→RL : U \to \mathbb{R}L:U→R on an open neighborhood U⊆MU \subseteq MU⊆M of x0x_0x0​ with L(x0)=0L(x_0) = 0L(x0​)=0, L>0L > 0L>0 on U∖{x0}U \setminus \{x_0\}U∖{x0​}, and L(φ(t0))≥L(φ(t1))L(\varphi(t_0)) \ge L(\varphi(t_1))L(φ(t0​))≥L(φ(t1​)) for every integral curve φ\varphiφ and all t0<t1t_0 < t_1t0​<t1​ with φ(t0),φ(t1)∈U∖{x0}\varphi(t_0), \varphi(t_1) \in U \setminus \{x_0\}φ(t0​),φ(t1​)∈U∖{x0​}. It is strict if the inequality is always strict. SδS_\deltaSδ​ denotes the connected component of {x∈U:L(x)≤δ}\{x \in U : L(x) \le \delta\}{x∈U:L(x)≤δ} containing x0x_0x0​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.14 (Krasovskii–LaSalle principle)

Let x0x_0x0​ be a fixed point and LLL a Liapunov function at x0x_0x0​ on UUU. Write (∗)(\ast)(∗) for: LLL is not constant on any orbit lying entirely in U∖{x0}U \setminus \{x_0\}U∖{x0​}, i.e. every y∈My \in My∈M with γ(y)⊆U∖{x0}\gamma(y) \subseteq U \setminus \{x_0\}γ(y)⊆U∖{x0​} has points a,b∈γ(y)a, b \in \gamma(y)a,b∈γ(y) with L(a)≠L(b)L(a) \ne L(b)L(a)=L(b). Then

(∗) ⟹ x0 is asymptotically stable;L strict ⟹ (∗);(\ast) \ \Longrightarrow\ x_0 \text{ is asymptotically stable}; \qquad L \text{ strict} \ \Longrightarrow\ (\ast);(∗) ⟹ x0​ is asymptotically stable;L strict ⟹ (∗);

and, under (∗)(\ast)(∗), every x∈Mx \in Mx∈M whose forward orbit lies in a compact subset of UUU satisfies Φ(t,x)→x0\Phi(t, x) \to x_0Φ(t,x)→x0​ as t→∞t \to \inftyt→∞.

Milestones

In attack order: Theorem 6.1 (the maximal flow exists, WWW is open, Φ\PhiΦ is CkC^kCk on WWW, and Φ(t+s,x)=Φ(t,Φ(s,x))\Phi(t+s, x) = \Phi(t, \Phi(s, x))Φ(t+s,x)=Φ(t,Φ(s,x))); Lemma 6.3 (a forward orbit in a compact subset of MMM forces T+(x)=∞T_+(x) = \inftyT+​(x)=∞); Lemma 6.6 (ω±(x)\omega_\pm(x)ω±​(x) is then nonempty, compact and connected); Lemma 6.7 (d(Φ(t,x),ω±(x))→0d(\Phi(t, x), \omega_\pm(x)) \to 0d(Φ(t,x),ω±​(x))→0); Theorem 6.15 (a function non-increasing along γ+(x)⊆U\gamma_+(x) \subseteq Uγ+​(x)⊆U is constant on ω+(x)∩U\omega_+(x) \cap Uω+​(x)∩U); Lemma 6.11 (a closed SδS_\deltaSδ​ is positively invariant); Lemma 6.12 (Sε⊆Bδ(x0)S_\varepsilon \subseteq B_\delta(x_0)Sε​⊆Bδ​(x0​) and Bε(x0)⊆SδB_\varepsilon(x_0) \subseteq S_\deltaBε​(x0​)⊆Sδ​); Theorem 6.13 (Liapunov: a Liapunov function makes x0x_0x0​ stable).

Significance

The result itself. The invariance principle is the form of Liapunov's method used in applications. It gives asymptotic stability of damped mechanical systems from their energy, of gradient systems from their potential, and of adaptive and passivity-based controllers, where the natural Liapunov function is only non-increasing. Its limit-set formulation (Theorem 6.15) is also the entry point to the Poincaré–Bendixson theory of the next chapter, which uses the same ω\omegaω-limit sets.

Formalizing it. Mathlib has local existence and uniqueness for ODEs and a theory of ω\omegaω-limit sets for global flows (omegaLimit, Flow). It has no maximal solution of an ODE, no local flow with its maximal intervals, and no Liapunov stability theory. The results are classical and proved in the book; none has a machine-checked proof on this platform. This mission builds the local-flow and limit-set layer and the Liapunov layer on top of it.

Difficulty

The central difficulty is that the flow is local. The book's arguments pass freely between "the solution stays in a compact set" and "the solution exists for all positive time" (Lemma 6.3). In a formal setting every statement about Φ(t,x)\Phi(t, x)Φ(t,x) must first establish t∈Ixt \in I_xt∈Ix​, and the maximal interval must be constructed from local solutions. Theorem 6.1 on its own requires gluing local solutions into a maximal one and proving that the domain WWW is open with CkC^kCk dependence on initial conditions.

A common first idea is to assume the vector field is complete, so that Mathlib's global Flow and omegaLimit apply directly. That assumption is not available: the goal concerns orbits that stay in the neighborhood UUU, and completeness of such orbits is a consequence of the argument, not a hypothesis. Similarly, LLL is only continuous, so a derivative-based criterion ∇L⋅f≤0\nabla L \cdot f \le 0∇L⋅f≤0 cannot replace condition (6.36).

Formalization scope

The state space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), so ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ is the Euclidean norm, and Br(x0)B_r(x_0)Br​(x0​) is the open ball Metric.ball. The standing assumption f∈Ck(M,Rn)f \in C^k(M, \mathbb{R}^n)f∈Ck(M,Rn), k≥1k \ge 1k≥1, MMM open, is a binder of every theorem (as ContDiffOn ℝ 1 f M, the weakest case, and for general k≥1k \ge 1k≥1 in Theorem 6.1). The flow enters as a pair (I, Φ) satisfying IsMaximalFlow f M I Φ, which characterizes the maximal integral curves uniquely. Theorem 6.1 proves that such a pair exists, so no completeness or extra regularity is assumed. The two time directions σ∈{±}\sigma \in \{\pm\}σ∈{±} of Lemmas 6.3–6.7 are one statement with a real parameter σ = 1 ∨ σ = -1. The ω\omegaω-limit set contains only points of MMM, as in the book.

Stability conclusions include existence of the solution for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0. The Liapunov condition quantifies over every integral curve and constrains only the two endpoint values, exactly as (6.36). LLL is a total function whose values off UUU are never read.

Correction to the printed statement. The book's final sentence of Theorem 6.14, "every orbit lying entirely in U(x0)U(x_0)U(x0​) converges to x0x_0x0​", is false as printed. With U=M=R2U = M = \mathbb{R}^2U=M=R2 and a strict Liapunov function, some orbits escape to infinity (Khalil, §4.1). The goal therefore asks for convergence of every forward orbit contained in a compact subset of UUU, which is what the book's argument uses. The other two parts are as printed.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: stability and asymptotic stability are stated for the maximal flow, with existence for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0 required, and not for an arbitrary map Φ or a flow assumed global. Asymptotic stability keeps both conjuncts, stability and attraction.

Needed infrastructure: maximal solutions of C1C^1C1 autonomous ODEs and their continuation (reusable across Chapters 6–13), openness of WWW and smooth dependence on initial data, compactness arguments for limit sets, and connected components of sublevel sets. Contributions of the local-flow layer as standalone lemmas are especially welcome, since later missions of this series rely on the same objects.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, AMS, 2012; author's preliminary version, Chapter 6, pp. 187–208. https://www.mat.univie.ac.at/~gerald/ftp/book-ode/ode.pdf (published book: https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/140)
  • J. P. LaSalle, Some extensions of Liapunov's second method, IRE Transactions on Circuit Theory 7 (1960), 520–527. https://doi.org/10.1109/TCT.1960.1086720
  • E. A. Barbashin and N. N. Krasovskii, On global stability of motion, Doklady Akademii Nauk SSSR 86 (1952), 453–456.
  • H. K. Khalil, Nonlinear Systems, 3rd ed., Prentice Hall, 2002, §4.1–4.2. https://www.pearson.com/en-us/subject-catalog/p/nonlinear-systems/P200000003359
19 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Dynamical Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems I: Existence, Uniqueness and Peano's TheoremTextbook

Why initial value problems come first

Almost every quantitative statement about an ordinary differential equation, from the stability of an equilibrium to the existence of a periodic orbit, presupposes that the equation has a solution through each initial point and, usually, that this solution is unique and depends continuously on the data. Chapter 2 of Gerald Teschl's graduate textbook Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems (author's preliminary version of AMS GSM 140, 2012) establishes these facts for first-order systems in Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn. It is the foundation for the rest of the series: the flows, limit sets, Poincaré maps and invariant manifolds of later chapters are all built on the existence, uniqueness and extension results proved here.

A short history. Local existence was first proved in the nineteenth century by polygonal approximation (Cauchy) under differentiability-type hypotheses. Lipschitz isolated the condition that bears his name. Picard and Lindelöf established existence and uniqueness by successive approximation, and Banach (1922) abstracted the argument into the contraction principle. Peano (1890) showed that continuity of the right-hand side alone suffices for existence, without uniqueness. Gronwall's inequality and its integral generalisations give the continuous dependence estimates. Teschl's chapter presents all of these in a uniform notation.

Setting

An initial value problem (IVP) is

x˙=f(t,x),x(t0)=x0,(2.10)\dot x = f(t, x), \qquad x(t_0) = x_0, \qquad (2.10)x˙=f(t,x),x(t0​)=x0​,(2.10)

where fff is a continuous map from an open set U⊆R×RnU \subseteq \mathbb{R} \times \mathbb{R}^nU⊆R×Rn to Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn and (t0,x0)∈U(t_0, x_0) \in U(t0​,x0​)∈U. Here ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ is the Euclidean norm on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn. A solution on an interval III is a function x:I→Rnx : I \to \mathbb{R}^nx:I→Rn whose graph {(t,x(t)):t∈I}\{(t, x(t)) : t \in I\}{(t,x(t)):t∈I} lies in UUU and which is differentiable on III (one-sidedly at an endpoint that belongs to III) with x˙(t)=f(t,x(t))\dot x(t) = f(t, x(t))x˙(t)=f(t,x(t)). Such a solution is automatically continuously differentiable.

The function fff is locally Lipschitz in the second argument, uniformly with respect to the first, if for every compact V0⊆UV_0 \subseteq UV0​⊆U there is a constant LLL with ∣f(t,x)−f(t,y)∣≤L∣x−y∣|f(t,x) - f(t,y)| \le L|x - y|∣f(t,x)−f(t,y)∣≤L∣x−y∣ whenever (t,x),(t,y)∈V0(t,x), (t,y) \in V_0(t,x),(t,y)∈V0​ (the book's (2.18)).

For T,δ>0T, \delta > 0T,δ>0 let V=[t0,t0+T]×Bˉδ(x0)V = [t_0, t_0 + T] \times \bar B_\delta(x_0)V=[t0​,t0​+T]×Bˉδ​(x0​), where Bˉδ(x0)={x:∣x−x0∣≤δ}\bar B_\delta(x_0) = \{x : |x - x_0| \le \delta\}Bˉδ​(x0​)={x:∣x−x0​∣≤δ}, let M=max⁡V∣f∣M = \max_V |f|M=maxV​∣f∣, and define the existence time

T0=min⁡{T,δM},with δM=∞ when M=0.T_0 = \min\Bigl\{T, \frac{\delta}{M}\Bigr\}, \qquad \text{with } \frac{\delta}{M} = \infty \text{ when } M = 0 .T0​=min{T,Mδ​},with Mδ​=∞ when M=0.

The chapter also works in a real Banach space XXX, a complete normed real vector space, where a contraction of a closed set C⊆XC \subseteq XC⊆X is a map K:C→CK : C \to CK:C→C with ∥K(x)−K(y)∥≤θ∥x−y∥\|K(x) - K(y)\| \le \theta\|x - y\|∥K(x)−K(y)∥≤θ∥x−y∥ for some θ∈[0,1)\theta \in [0, 1)θ∈[0,1).

Formalization targets

Goal: Peano's existence theorem (Theorem 2.19)

If fff is continuous on V=[t0,t0+T]×Bˉδ(x0)V = [t_0, t_0 + T] \times \bar B_\delta(x_0)V=[t0​,t0​+T]×Bˉδ​(x0​) and M=max⁡V∣f∣M = \max_V |f|M=maxV​∣f∣, then there is a function xxx with x(t0)=x0x(t_0) = x_0x(t0​)=x0​ solving

x˙(t)=f(t,x(t)),∣x(t)−x0∣≤δ,t∈[t0,t0+T0],\dot x(t) = f(t, x(t)), \qquad |x(t) - x_0| \le \delta, \qquad t \in [t_0, t_0 + T_0],x˙(t)=f(t,x(t)),∣x(t)−x0​∣≤δ,t∈[t0​,t0​+T0​],

and the analogous statement holds on [t0−T0,t0][t_0 - T_0, t_0][t0​−T0​,t0​] with V=[t0−T,t0]×Bˉδ(x0)V = [t_0 - T, t_0] \times \bar B_\delta(x_0)V=[t0​−T,t0​]×Bˉδ​(x0​). No Lipschitz condition is assumed and the solution need not be unique.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 2.1 (contraction principle). A contraction of a nonempty closed subset of a Banach space has a unique fixed point xˉ\bar xxˉ, and ∥Km(x)−xˉ∥≤θm1−θ∥K(x)−x∥\|K^m(x) - \bar x\| \le \frac{\theta^m}{1-\theta}\|K(x) - x\|∥Km(x)−xˉ∥≤1−θθm​∥K(x)−x∥ for every x∈Cx \in Cx∈C.
  2. Theorem 2.2 (Picard–Lindelöf). Under the local Lipschitz condition, (2.10) has a solution on an open interval around t0t_0t0​; two solutions on any interval containing t0t_0t0​ coincide; and a solution exists on [t0,t0+T0][t_0, t_0 + T_0][t0​,t0​+T0​] with graph in VVV (and on [t0−T0,t0][t_0 - T_0, t_0][t0​−T0​,t0​]).
  3. Theorem 2.4 (Weissinger). If ∥Km(x)−Km(y)∥≤θm∥x−y∥\|K^m(x) - K^m(y)\| \le \theta_m\|x - y\|∥Km(x)−Km(y)∥≤θm​∥x−y∥ with ∑θm<∞\sum \theta_m < \infty∑θm​<∞, then KKK has a unique fixed point and ∥Km(x)−xˉ∥≤(∑j≥mθj)∥K(x)−x∥\|K^m(x) - \bar x\| \le \bigl(\sum_{j \ge m}\theta_j\bigr)\|K(x) - x\|∥Km(x)−xˉ∥≤(∑j≥m​θj​)∥K(x)−x∥.
  4. Lemma 2.7 (generalised Gronwall). ψ≤α+∫0tβψ\psi \le \alpha + \int_0^t \beta\psiψ≤α+∫0t​βψ with β≥0\beta \ge 0β≥0 implies ψ(t)≤α(t)+∫0tα(s)β(s)e∫stβ ds\psi(t) \le \alpha(t) + \int_0^t \alpha(s)\beta(s)e^{\int_s^t \beta}\,dsψ(t)≤α(t)+∫0t​α(s)β(s)e∫st​βds, and ψ(t)≤α(t)e∫0tβ\psi(t) \le \alpha(t)e^{\int_0^t\beta}ψ(t)≤α(t)e∫0t​β for nondecreasing α\alphaα.
  5. Theorem 2.8 (continuous dependence). ∣x(t)−y(t)∣≤∣x0−y0∣eL∣t−t0∣+ML(eL∣t−t0∣−1)|x(t) - y(t)| \le |x_0 - y_0|e^{L|t-t_0|} + \frac{M}{L}(e^{L|t-t_0|} - 1)∣x(t)−y(t)∣≤∣x0​−y0​∣eL∣t−t0​∣+LM​(eL∣t−t0​∣−1) for solutions of x˙=f(t,x)\dot x = f(t,x)x˙=f(t,x) and y˙=g(t,y)\dot y = g(t,y)y˙​=g(t,y).
  6. Theorem 2.17 (global existence). If ∣f(t,x)∣≤M(T)+L(T)∣x∣|f(t,x)| \le M(T) + L(T)|x|∣f(t,x)∣≤M(T)+L(T)∣x∣ on [−T,T]×Rn[-T, T] \times \mathbb{R}^n[−T,T]×Rn for every T>0T > 0T>0, every solution extends to all of R\mathbb{R}R.
  7. Theorem 2.18 (Arzelà–Ascoli). A bounded, equicontinuous sequence in C([a,b],Rn)C([a,b], \mathbb{R}^n)C([a,b],Rn) has a uniformly convergent subsequence.

Significance

Peano's theorem is the existence statement with the weakest regularity hypothesis on fff in the classical theory. It is what lets one speak of solutions of equations with non-Lipschitz right-hand sides, such as x˙=∣x∣\dot x = \sqrt{|x|}x˙=∣x∣​, and it is the starting point for the theory of non-unique solutions and differential inclusions. The explicit existence time T0=min⁡{T,δ/M}T_0 = \min\{T, \delta/M\}T0​=min{T,δ/M} is the quantitative form used whenever one needs a uniform lower bound on the lifetime of solutions starting in a compact set. Picard–Lindelöf, Gronwall and continuous dependence together make the IVP well posed. The global existence theorem under linear growth is used throughout the later chapters to define global flows.

Mathlib already contains a Picard–Lindelöf theorem (IsPicardLindelof), Gronwall's inequality in differential form, the Banach fixed point theorem for complete (extended) metric spaces, and an Arzelà–Ascoli theorem for bounded continuous functions. It does not contain Peano's theorem, the integral form of the generalised Gronwall inequality with variable α\alphaα, Weissinger's theorem, or global existence under linear growth. The statements here are phrased in the book's setting: one-sided intervals, the M=0M = 0M=0 convention for T0T_0T0​, local Lipschitz conditions on an open set, Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn-valued functions. Connecting them to the existing Mathlib results is part of the work.

Difficulty

For Peano's theorem the obvious approach, Picard iteration, does not apply. Without a Lipschitz condition the integral operator x↦x0+∫t0tf(s,x(s)) dsx \mapsto x_0 + \int_{t_0}^t f(s, x(s))\,dsx↦x0​+∫t0​t​f(s,x(s))ds need not be a contraction on any ball, its fixed points need not be unique, and a sequence of approximate solutions need not converge. Any argument has to produce a solution without a uniqueness mechanism and still reach the full interval [t0,t0+T0][t_0, t_0 + T_0][t0​,t0​+T0​] that the theorem specifies, not merely some shorter one. On the formal side, derivatives relative to closed intervals, the M=0M = 0M=0 corner of T0T_0T0​, and passing between the differential and the integral form of the IVP all need care.

For Theorem 2.17 the difficulty is that "every solution is defined on all of R\mathbb{R}R" is a statement about maximal solutions, and the book defines these only through a gluing construction. Without a Lipschitz condition that construction is no longer unique. An a-priori bound on ∣x(t)∣|x(t)|∣x(t)∣ alone does not give extension beyond a finite endpoint.

Formalization scope

  • State space. Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), so ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ is the Euclidean norm. The right-hand side is a total function f:R×Rn→Rnf : \mathbb{R} \times \mathbb{R}^n \to \mathbb{R}^nf:R×Rn→Rn; hypotheses restrict attention to UUU or VVV. Banach spaces are real normed spaces with CompleteSpace.
  • Solutions. IsSolutionOn U f I x: for every t∈It \in It∈I, (t,x(t))∈U(t, x(t)) \in U(t,x(t))∈U and xxx has derivative f(t,x(t))f(t, x(t))f(t,x(t)) at ttt relative to III. Initial conditions are separate hypotheses.
  • Closed ball. The book writes the open ball Bδ(x0)B_\delta(x_0)Bδ​(x0​) in Theorems 2.2 and 2.19 but takes a maximum over VVV and uses ∣x(t)−x0∣≤δ|x(t) - x_0| \le \delta∣x(t)−x0​∣≤δ in the proofs. The statements use the closed ball: over the open ball the maximum may not exist, and the solution can reach the sphere at t0+T0t_0 + T_0t0​+T0​.
  • Quantifier readings. "The maximum of ∣f∣|f|∣f∣ on VVV" is a variable MMM with IsGreatest {|f(p)| : p ∈ V} M. T0T_0T0​ is if M = 0 then T else min T (δ / M). "Some interval around t0t_0t0​" in Theorem 2.2 is ∃ε>0\exists \varepsilon > 0∃ε>0 with (t0−ε,t0+ε)(t_0 - \varepsilon, t_0 + \varepsilon)(t0​−ε,t0​+ε), and "unique" means uniqueness on every interval containing t0t_0t0​. In Theorem 2.8 the suprema LLL, MMM of (2.41) become arbitrary constants L≥0L \ge 0L≥0, MMM bounding the same quantities, which is equivalent because the bound is monotone in both; the case L=0L = 0L=0 uses the limit M∣t−t0∣M|t - t_0|M∣t−t0​∣. In Theorem 2.17 the constants M(T),L(T)M(T), L(T)M(T),L(T) are existential inside ∀T>0\forall T > 0∀T>0, so they may depend on TTT but not on xxx. "All solutions are defined for all ttt" means that every solution on an open interval extends to a solution on R\mathbb{R}R.
  • Hypotheses of Theorem 2.17. Section 2.6 opens with a standing assumption of local uniqueness, but Theorem 2.17's own text needs only continuity and (2.66), and the book's remark after Theorem 2.13 covers maximal solutions without uniqueness. The statement assumes only continuity of fff and (2.66); it is therefore at least as strong as the book's.
  • Added regularity. Lemma 2.7 assumes ψ,α,β\psi, \alpha, \betaψ,α,β continuous on [0,T][0, T][0,T], which the book leaves implicit.
  • Ruling out trivial readings. An existence statement in which the interval collapses to a point would be trivially true. Here T,δ>0T, \delta > 0T,δ>0 are required, T0=TT_0 = TT0​=T when M=0M = 0M=0 (never Lean's δ/0=0\delta/0 = 0δ/0=0), and a solution must satisfy the differential equation at every point of [t0,t0+T0][t_0, t_0 + T_0][t0​,t0​+T0​] with the book's T0T_0T0​, not on some unspecified shorter interval.

A complete development needs derivatives within intervals, interval integrals, uniform convergence and compactness in C([a,b],Rn)C([a,b], \mathbb{R}^n)C([a,b],Rn). The definitions IsSolutionOn and LocallyLipschitzSecond are reused throughout the Teschl series. Contributions that connect these statements to Mathlib's IsPicardLindelof, ContractingWith and BoundedContinuousFunction.arzela_ascoli are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Teschl, Ordinary Differential Equations and Dynamical Systems, Graduate Studies in Mathematics 140, American Mathematical Society, 2012. Author's preliminary version: https://www.mat.univie.ac.at/~gerald/ftp/book-ode/ode.pdf ; published version: https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/140
  • G. Peano, Démonstration de l'intégrabilité des équations différentielles ordinaires, Mathematische Annalen 37 (1890), 182–228. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01200235
  • S. Banach, Sur les opérations dans les ensembles abstraits et leur application aux équations intégrales, Fundamenta Mathematicae 3 (1922), 133–181. https://doi.org/10.4064/fm-3-1-133-181
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Pure Mathematics·Captain: mikedeng1

Tasty Bits of Several Complex Variables II: The Ball and the Polydisc Are Not BiholomorphicTextbook

Motivation

In one complex variable the Riemann mapping theorem classifies a whole class of domains by topology alone: every nonempty simply connected proper subdomain of C\mathbb{C}C is biholomorphic to the unit disc. Nothing of the kind holds in several variables. The two most obvious generalizations of the disc to Cn\mathbb{C}^nCn, the unit ball and the unit polydisc, are homeomorphic, yet no biholomorphic map carries one onto the other. This is the first result a student of several complex variables meets that has no one-variable shadow, and it is the standard illustration that the geometry of the boundary, not the topology of the domain, governs holomorphic equivalence.

As recounted in the source, Poincaré (1907) observed the inequivalence by computing the automorphism groups of D2\mathbb{D}^2D2 and B2\mathbb{B}_2B2​, assuming the maps extend past the boundary; H. Cartan gave the first complete proof in 1931; and Rothstein (1935) proved that there is not even a proper holomorphic map from the bidisc to the ball. This mission follows the presentation in §1.4–1.6 of J. Lebl, Tasty Bits of Several Complex Variables (version 4.4, 2026), where the inequivalence is derived from a general theorem on proper maps out of product domains, followed by Cartan's uniqueness theorem and the basic structure theory of zero sets and injective maps.

Setting

Write Cn\mathbb{C}^nCn for nnn-tuples z=(z1,…,zn)z = (z_1, \dots, z_n)z=(z1​,…,zn​) of complex numbers, D={ζ∈C:∣ζ∣<1}\mathbb{D} = \{\zeta \in \mathbb{C} : |\zeta| < 1\}D={ζ∈C:∣ζ∣<1} for the unit disc, and ∥z∥=(∣z1∣2+⋯+∣zn∣2)1/2\|z\| = (|z_1|^2 + \cdots + |z_n|^2)^{1/2}∥z∥=(∣z1​∣2+⋯+∣zn​∣2)1/2 for the Euclidean norm. The unit ball and unit polydisc are

Bn={z∈Cn:∣z1∣2+⋯+∣zn∣2<1},Dn={z∈Cn:∣zk∣<1 for k=1,…,n},\mathbb{B}_n = \{ z \in \mathbb{C}^n : |z_1|^2 + \cdots + |z_n|^2 < 1 \}, \qquad \mathbb{D}^n = \{ z \in \mathbb{C}^n : |z_k| < 1 \text{ for } k = 1, \dots, n \},Bn​={z∈Cn:∣z1​∣2+⋯+∣zn​∣2<1},Dn={z∈Cn:∣zk​∣<1 for k=1,…,n},

and the unit sphere is S2n−1=∂Bn={z:∣z1∣2+⋯+∣zn∣2=1}S^{2n-1} = \partial\mathbb{B}_n = \{ z : |z_1|^2 + \cdots + |z_n|^2 = 1 \}S2n−1=∂Bn​={z:∣z1​∣2+⋯+∣zn​∣2=1}. A domain is a nonempty connected open set. A map between open subsets of complex spaces is holomorphic if it is complex differentiable at every point.

A continuous map f:U→Vf : U \to Vf:U→V is proper if f−1(K)f^{-1}(K)f−1(K) is compact for every compact K⊂VK \subset VK⊂V. A biholomorphic map f:U→Vf : U \to Vf:U→V is a holomorphic bijection whose inverse is holomorphic; every biholomorphism is proper. An analytic disc is a nonconstant holomorphic map φ:D→Cn\varphi : \mathbb{D} \to \mathbb{C}^nφ:D→Cn, and a set SSS contains no analytic discs if no analytic disc has φ(D)⊂S\varphi(\mathbb{D}) \subset Sφ(D)⊂S. A circular domain is a domain UUU with eiθz∈Ue^{i\theta} z \in Ueiθz∈U whenever z∈Uz \in Uz∈U and θ∈R\theta \in \mathbb{R}θ∈R.

Formalization targets

Goal: Rothstein's theorem (Theorem 1.4.4)

there is no proper holomorphic map f:D2→B2.\text{there is no proper holomorphic map } f : \mathbb{D}^2 \to \mathbb{B}_2 .there is no proper holomorphic map f:D2→B2​.

The path to the goal

  • Proposition 1.4.6. S2n−1S^{2n-1}S2n−1 contains no analytic discs.
  • Lemma 1.4.7. For bounded domains U⊂RnU \subset \mathbb{R}^nU⊂Rn, V⊂RmV \subset \mathbb{R}^mV⊂Rm and continuous f:U→Vf : U \to Vf:U→V: fff is proper if and only if, whenever pk∈Up_k \in Upk​∈U and pk→p∈∂Up_k \to p \in \partial Upk​→p∈∂U, every limit point of {f(pk)}\{f(p_k)\}{f(pk​)} lies in ∂V\partial V∂V.
  • Theorem 1.4.8. If U=U′×U′′⊂Cn×CkU = U' \times U'' \subset \mathbb{C}^n \times \mathbb{C}^kU=U′×U′′⊂Cn×Ck (n,k≥1n, k \ge 1n,k≥1) and V⊂CmV \subset \mathbb{C}^mV⊂Cm are bounded domains and ∂V\partial V∂V contains no analytic discs, there is no proper holomorphic map U→VU \to VU→V.

Further results on the same definitions

  • Theorem 1.5.1 (Cartan). If U⊂CnU \subset \mathbb{C}^nU⊂Cn is a bounded domain, a∈Ua \in Ua∈U, f:U→Uf : U \to Uf:U→U holomorphic, f(a)=af(a) = af(a)=a and Df(a)=IDf(a) = IDf(a)=I, then f(z)=zf(z) = zf(z)=z on UUU.
  • Corollary 1.5.2. A biholomorphism f:U→Vf : U \to Vf:U→V of bounded circular domains with f(0)=0f(0) = 0f(0)=0 is the restriction of a linear map.
  • Theorem 1.6.1 (Riemann extension). If g∈O(U)g \in \mathcal{O}(U)g∈O(U) is not identically zero on a domain UUU and f∈O(U∖g−1(0))f \in \mathcal{O}(U \setminus g^{-1}(0))f∈O(U∖g−1(0)) is locally bounded in UUU, then fff extends uniquely to some F∈O(U)F \in \mathcal{O}(U)F∈O(U).
  • Theorem 1.6.2. The zero set of a holomorphic function that is not identically zero on a domain is, on an open dense subset of itself, locally a graph zn=g(z1,…,zn−1)z_n = g(z_1, \dots, z_{n-1})zn​=g(z1​,…,zn−1​) after reordering the variables.
  • Theorem 1.6.6. An injective holomorphic map U→CnU \to \mathbb{C}^nU→Cn on an open U⊂CnU \subset \mathbb{C}^nU⊂Cn has nowhere vanishing Jacobian determinant; a holomorphic bijection between open sets of Cn\mathbb{C}^nCn is biholomorphic.

The goal is chosen as the textbook's headline result of §1.4. Theorem 1.4.8 is strictly more general; it is a milestone, so a solver may prove the goal as its special case.

Significance

Rothstein's theorem implies the biholomorphic inequivalence of B2\mathbb{B}_2B2​ and D2\mathbb{D}^2D2, the basic example that the Riemann mapping theorem has no analogue in several variables. Theorem 1.4.8 isolates the reason: a boundary that contains analytic discs cannot be mapped properly into a boundary that contains none. Cartan's uniqueness theorem and its corollary are the standard tools for computing automorphism groups of the ball and the polydisc. The Riemann extension theorem, the local graph structure of zero sets and the Jacobian criterion for injective maps are used throughout the theory of analytic varieties and of holomorphic mappings.

All of these results are classical and proved in the source. None of them is formalized in Mathlib or on the platform for Cn\mathbb{C}^nCn with n≥2n \ge 2n≥2: Mathlib has one-variable Riemann removable singularities and the maximum modulus principle, and the platform has one-variable results on injective holomorphic maps. This mission produces machine-checked statements of the several-variable versions, and infrastructure (proper maps between subsets, analytic discs, holomorphic families) that later chapters of the series reuse.

Difficulty

The goal cannot be reached through topology: D2\mathbb{D}^2D2 and B2\mathbb{B}_2B2​ are homeomorphic, so any argument must use holomorphy essentially and must see the boundary. The step that needs genuine analysis is passing from properness, a statement about compact sets, to a statement about boundary values of holomorphic functions of one variable along slices of the product domain; this requires normal families (Montel's theorem) in several variables, which Mathlib does not provide in the needed form. Cartan's theorem rests on power-series expansions in homogeneous parts and vector-valued Cauchy estimates on polydiscs. Theorem 1.6.2 needs the holomorphic implicit function theorem and Rouché's theorem, and Theorem 1.6.6 an induction on dimension that runs through Theorem 1.6.2. The Riemann extension theorem needs holomorphy of parameter-dependent Cauchy integrals.

Formalization scope

Cn\mathbb{C}^nCn is Fin n → ℂ. Mathlib's norm on this type is the sup norm, so Metric.ball 0 1 is the polydisc, not the ball. The ball and the sphere are therefore defined with the explicit Euclidean condition, unitBall n = {z | ∑ k, ‖z k‖ ^ 2 < 1} and unitSphere n = {z | ∑ k, ‖z k‖ ^ 2 = 1}. The polydisc is written coordinatewise as unitPolydisc n. Reading the ball as the sup-norm ball would trivialize the goal (the identity of the bidisc is a proper holomorphic self-map); the definitions exclude that reading. Boundedness is Bornology.IsBounded, and boundaries are Mathlib's frontier; neither depends on the norm. A domain is IsOpen U ∧ IsConnected U, so it is nonempty.

Holomorphic means DifferentiableOn ℂ on an open set. On open sets this is equivalent to the book's Definition 1.1.2 (Proposition 1.1.3 and Theorem 1.2.1). Maps into Cm\mathbb{C}^mCm are Fin m → ℂ-valued. Df(a)Df(a)Df(a) is fderiv ℂ f a, and the Jacobian determinant is LinearMap.det of it. Maps are ambient functions whose values off the relevant set are irrelevant. Consequently:

  • Proper is IsProperMapOn f U V: f maps U into V, is continuous on U, and U ∩ f ⁻¹' K is compact for every compact K ⊆ V. This is Definition 1.4.3 for the restricted map. It is not IsProperMap of the ambient map.
  • Uniqueness in Theorem 1.6.1 is uniqueness on UUU.
  • The inverse of a biholomorphism is a function g holomorphic on VVV with Set.InvOn g f U V.

Lemma 1.4.7 works in Fin n → ℝ and reads "limit point of the sequence {f(pk)}\{f(p_k)\}{f(pk​)}" as a cluster point of the sequence (MapClusterPt). Theorem 1.4.8 uses the product type (Fin n → ℂ) × (Fin k → ℂ) for Cn×Ck\mathbb{C}^n \times \mathbb{C}^kCn×Ck. In Theorem 1.6.2, "after reordering the variables" means choosing the index j of the solved-for coordinate. The remaining coordinates are indexed by {i // i ≠ j}. Only the open-disc part of Definition 1.4.5 (analytic discs) is formalized, because closed analytic discs are not used here.

A complete development needs Montel's theorem for maps into bounded subsets of Cm\mathbb{C}^mCm, homogeneous expansions and Cauchy estimates on polydiscs, the holomorphic implicit function theorem, Rouché's theorem, and holomorphic parameter-dependent Cauchy integrals. All of it is reusable beyond this mission, and contributions of it are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Lebl, Tasty Bits of Several Complex Variables: A Whirlwind Tour of the Subject, version 4.4, 2026, §1.4–1.6 (pp. 32–46). https://www.jirka.org/scv/scv.pdf
  • H. Poincaré, Les fonctions analytiques de deux variables et la représentation conforme, Rend. Circ. Mat. Palermo 23 (1907), 185–220. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF03013518
  • S. G. Krantz, Function Theory of Several Complex Variables, 2nd ed., AMS Chelsea, 2001 (cited by Lebl as [K]). https://doi.org/10.1090/chel/340
18 thms3 active usersReviewed
Pure Mathematics·Captain: mikedeng1

Tasty Bits of Several Complex Variables I: Holomorphic Functions and Power Series on PolydiscsTextbook

Why holomorphic functions of several variables

Several complex variables studies functions of z=(z1,…,zn)∈Cnz = (z_1, \dots, z_n) \in \mathbb{C}^nz=(z1​,…,zn​)∈Cn that are holomorphic in every coordinate. It underlies complex geometry, the theory of analytic spaces, and parts of mathematical physics and harmonic analysis. Every later topic of the subject (domains of holomorphy, pseudoconvexity, the ∂ˉ\bar\partial∂ˉ-problem, the Bergman kernel, analytic varieties) starts from the same foundation: a function that is holomorphic in each variable separately and locally bounded is jointly smooth and is locally the sum of a convergent power series. This mission formalizes that foundation as it appears in the first chapter of Jiří Lebl's textbook Tasty Bits of Several Complex Variables (jirka.org/scv).

Historically, the step from separate to joint regularity is due to Osgood (1899), who showed that a continuous (later: locally bounded) function that is holomorphic in each variable separately is holomorphic; Hartogs (1906) later removed the boundedness assumption altogether, a much harder theorem not covered here.

Setting

Points of Cn\mathbb{C}^nCn are z=(z1,…,zn)z = (z_1, \dots, z_n)z=(z1​,…,zn​). For a center a∈Cna \in \mathbb{C}^na∈Cn and a polyradius ρ=(ρ1,…,ρn)\rho = (\rho_1, \dots, \rho_n)ρ=(ρ1​,…,ρn​) with every ρk>0\rho_k > 0ρk​>0, the polydisc is

Δρ(a)={z∈Cn:∣zk−ak∣<ρk, k=1,…,n},\Delta_\rho(a) = \{ z \in \mathbb{C}^n : |z_k - a_k| < \rho_k,\ k = 1, \dots, n \},Δρ​(a)={z∈Cn:∣zk​−ak​∣<ρk​, k=1,…,n},

a product of open discs Δ1×⋯×Δn\Delta_1 \times \cdots \times \Delta_nΔ1​×⋯×Δn​. Its distinguished boundary is the torus Γ=∂Δ1×⋯×∂Δn={∣ζk−ak∣=ρk for all k}\Gamma = \partial\Delta_1 \times \cdots \times \partial\Delta_n = \{ |\zeta_k - a_k| = \rho_k \text{ for all } k \}Γ=∂Δ1​×⋯×∂Δn​={∣ζk​−ak​∣=ρk​ for all k}, and Δ‾\overline{\Delta}Δ denotes the closed polydisc.

A function fff on an open set U⊂CnU \subset \mathbb{C}^nU⊂Cn is holomorphic (the book's Definition 1.1.2) if it is locally bounded (every point of UUU has a neighborhood on which fff is bounded) and complex-differentiable in each variable separately: for every z∈Uz \in Uz∈U and every kkk, the one-variable limit

lim⁡ξ→0f(z1,…,zk+ξ,…,zn)−f(z)ξ\lim_{\xi \to 0} \frac{f(z_1, \dots, z_k + \xi, \dots, z_n) - f(z)}{\xi}ξ→0lim​ξf(z1​,…,zk​+ξ,…,zn​)−f(z)​

exists. A map f=(f1,…,fm):U→Cmf = (f_1, \dots, f_m) : U \to \mathbb{C}^mf=(f1​,…,fm​):U→Cm is holomorphic if every component is.

A multi-index is α=(α1,…,αn)∈N0n\alpha = (\alpha_1, \dots, \alpha_n) \in \mathbb{N}_0^nα=(α1​,…,αn​)∈N0n​, with α!=α1!⋯αn!\alpha! = \alpha_1! \cdots \alpha_n!α!=α1​!⋯αn​!, (z−a)α=∏k(zk−ak)αk(z-a)^\alpha = \prod_k (z_k - a_k)^{\alpha_k}(z−a)α=∏k​(zk​−ak​)αk​ and ρα=∏kρkαk\rho^\alpha = \prod_k \rho_k^{\alpha_k}ρα=∏k​ρkαk​​. A power series ∑αcα(z−a)α\sum_\alpha c_\alpha (z-a)^\alpha∑α​cα​(z−a)α is summed over all multi-indices; since N0n\mathbb{N}_0^nN0n​ has no natural order, convergence means absolute convergence, and the series converges uniformly absolutely on a set XXX when ∑α∣cα(z−a)α∣\sum_\alpha |c_\alpha (z-a)^\alpha|∑α​∣cα​(z−a)α∣ converges uniformly for z∈Xz \in Xz∈X. The Wirtinger derivative is ∂/∂zk=12(∂/∂xk−i ∂/∂yk)\partial/\partial z_k = \tfrac12(\partial/\partial x_k - i\,\partial/\partial y_k)∂/∂zk​=21​(∂/∂xk​−i∂/∂yk​) for zk=xk+iykz_k = x_k + i y_kzk​=xk​+iyk​, and ∂∣α∣/∂zα\partial^{|\alpha|}/\partial z^\alpha∂∣α∣/∂zα applies ∂/∂zk\partial/\partial z_k∂/∂zk​ exactly αk\alpha_kαk​ times for each kkk.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1.2.1 (power series on a polydisc)

Let Δ=Δρ(a)\Delta = \Delta_\rho(a)Δ=Δρ​(a) be a polydisc. If f:Δ‾→Cf : \overline{\Delta} \to \mathbb{C}f:Δ→C is continuous and holomorphic in Δ\DeltaΔ, then there are coefficients cαc_\alphacα​ with

f(z)=∑αcα(z−a)α(z∈Δ),f(z) = \sum_\alpha c_\alpha (z-a)^\alpha \qquad (z \in \Delta),f(z)=α∑​cα​(z−a)α(z∈Δ),

the series converging uniformly absolutely on every compact subset of Δ\DeltaΔ. Conversely, a function defined on Δ\DeltaΔ by such a series is holomorphic on Δ\DeltaΔ. Both directions are part of the goal.

Milestones

In attack order:

  1. Proposition 1.1.3. A holomorphic function on an open UUU is C∞C^\inftyC∞, and every ∂f/∂zk\partial f/\partial z_k∂f/∂zk​ is again holomorphic.
  2. Theorem 1.1.4 (Cauchy integral formula). For fff continuous on Δ‾\overline{\Delta}Δ and holomorphic in Δ\DeltaΔ, and z∈Δz \in \Deltaz∈Δ,
f(z)=1(2πi)n∫Γf(ζ)(ζ1−z1)⋯(ζn−zn) dζ1∧⋯∧dζn.f(z) = \frac{1}{(2\pi i)^n} \int_\Gamma \frac{f(\zeta)}{(\zeta_1 - z_1)\cdots(\zeta_n - z_n)}\, d\zeta_1 \wedge \cdots \wedge d\zeta_n.f(z)=(2πi)n1​∫Γ​(ζ1​−z1​)⋯(ζn​−zn​)f(ζ)​dζ1​∧⋯∧dζn​.
  1. Proposition 1.2.2. The derivative formula ∂∣α∣f∂zα(z)=1(2πi)n∫Γα! f(ζ)(ζ−z)α+1 dζ\frac{\partial^{|\alpha|} f}{\partial z^\alpha}(z) = \frac{1}{(2\pi i)^n}\int_\Gamma \frac{\alpha!\, f(\zeta)}{(\zeta - z)^{\alpha+1}}\,d\zeta∂zα∂∣α∣f​(z)=(2πi)n1​∫Γ​(ζ−z)α+1α!f(ζ)​dζ, the coefficient formula cα=1α!∂∣α∣f∂zα(a)c_\alpha = \frac{1}{\alpha!}\frac{\partial^{|\alpha|} f}{\partial z^\alpha}(a)cα​=α!1​∂zα∂∣α∣f​(a), and the Cauchy estimates ∣cα∣≤∥f∥Γ/ρα|c_\alpha| \le \|f\|_\Gamma / \rho^\alpha∣cα​∣≤∥f∥Γ​/ρα.
  2. Proposition 1.2.3. A limit, uniform on compact subsets, of holomorphic functions is holomorphic, and all derivatives ∂∣α∣/∂zα\partial^{|\alpha|}/\partial z^\alpha∂∣α∣/∂zα converge uniformly on compact subsets.
  3. Theorem 1.2.7 (identity theorem). On a domain, a holomorphic function vanishing on a nonempty open subset vanishes identically.
  4. Theorem 1.2.8 (maximum principle). On a domain, if ∣f∣|f|∣f∣ has a local maximum at aaa, then f≡f(a)f \equiv f(a)f≡f(a).
  5. Theorem 1.3.5. Compositions of holomorphic mappings are holomorphic.
  6. Proposition 1.3.7. For holomorphic f:U→Cnf : U \to \mathbb{C}^nf:U→Cn, ∣det⁡Df(p)∣2=det⁡DRf(p)|\det Df(p)|^2 = \det D_{\mathbb{R}} f(p)∣detDf(p)∣2=detDR​f(p).

Significance

Theorem 1.2.1 is the statement that makes the theory of several complex variables possible: it identifies the book's elementary, one-variable-at-a-time definition of holomorphy with local representability by power series. Uniqueness of the coefficients, the Cauchy estimates, the identity theorem, the maximum principle, and holomorphy of compositions and of implicit functions all follow from it, and every later chapter of the book (Hartogs figures, pseudoconvexity, the Bergman kernel, Weierstrass preparation) uses it without comment.

Mathlib already develops complex analysis in several variables for Fréchet-differentiable maps: analyticity of DifferentiableOn ℂ functions, torusIntegral, Cauchy integrals over circles, and Osgood-type regularity for maps on Cn\mathbb{C}^nCn are available or published on the platform. What this mission adds is the bridge from the weaker separate notion of holomorphy, with local boundedness, to these results, stated with multi-index power series and uniform absolute convergence on compact sets exactly as in the textbook. The results are classical and fully proved in the book; none has a machine-checked proof in this form.

Difficulty

The hypothesis controls fff only along complex lines parallel to the coordinate axes, plus a bound. Nothing in the definition says that fff is continuous, let alone jointly differentiable, so no joint limit, Fréchet derivative, or change of the order of integration is available at the start. Every tool that the one-variable theory and Mathlib's multivariable library supply presupposes joint regularity; the obstacle is to obtain it from separate information.

A second difficulty is bookkeeping: power series over N0n\mathbb{N}_0^nN0n​ have no natural order, so convergence must be handled as unconditional summation with a uniformity statement over compact sets, and iterated Wirtinger derivatives must be related to derivatives of the series term by term.

Formalization scope

  • Cn\mathbb{C}^nCn is Fin n → ℂ; multi-indices are Fin n → ℕ. A polyradius is ρ : Fin n → ℝ with the hypothesis ∀ k, 0 < ρ k; the polydisc is defined coordinatewise (not Metric.ball, which only gives equal radii).
  • Holomorphy is the book's Definition 1.1.2, IsHolomorphicOn f U: local boundedness plus complex differentiability at ξ=0\xi = 0ξ=0 of ξ↦f(z1,…,zk+ξ,…,zn)\xi \mapsto f(z_1, \dots, z_k + \xi, \dots, z_n)ξ↦f(z1​,…,zk​+ξ,…,zn​) (via Function.update). Openness of UUU is a hypothesis wherever the book says "open". Maps into Cm\mathbb{C}^mCm are holomorphic componentwise.
  • Ruled out: defining holomorphy as Mathlib's DifferentiableOn ℂ. That makes Proposition 1.1.3 and the first half of the goal off-target (they would follow from existing library results) and is not the book's definition.
  • The closed polydisc is closure (polydisc a ρ); "continuous on Δ‾\overline{\Delta}Δ, holomorphic in Δ\DeltaΔ" keeps both hypotheses.
  • Power series: HasSum (unconditional summation) of the terms cα(z−a)αc_\alpha (z-a)^\alphacα​(z−a)α to f(z)f(z)f(z), and uniform absolute convergence on a set XXX means the finite partial sums of ∣cα(z−a)α∣|c_\alpha (z-a)^\alpha|∣cα​(z−a)α∣, directed by inclusion, converge uniformly on XXX. Mathlib's HasFPowerSeriesOnBall is not used: its balls for the sup norm are equiradial polydiscs only.
  • The integral over Γ\GammaΓ is torusIntegral, whose parametrization ζk=ak+ρkeiθk\zeta_k = a_k + \rho_k e^{i\theta_k}ζk​=ak​+ρk​eiθk​ includes the Jacobian ∏kiρkeiθk\prod_k i\rho_k e^{i\theta_k}∏k​iρk​eiθk​ and orients each circle positively. The integrands are continuous on the compact torus, so no integrability hypothesis is needed.
  • ∂/∂zk\partial/\partial z_k∂/∂zk​ is defined from real partial derivatives (deriv along t↦zk+tt \mapsto z_k + tt↦zk​+t and t↦zk+itt \mapsto z_k + itt↦zk​+it); ∂∣α∣/∂zα\partial^{|\alpha|}/\partial z^\alpha∂∣α∣/∂zα iterates it. det⁡DRf(p)\det D_{\mathbb{R}} f(p)detDR​f(p) is LinearMap.det of the real Fréchet derivative, which is basis independent.
  • The Cauchy estimate is stated for every bound MMM of ∣f∣|f|∣f∣ on Γ\GammaΓ, which is equivalent to the book's ∥f∥Γ\|f\|_\Gamma∥f∥Γ​ form.

A complete development needs the one-variable Cauchy integral formula (in Mathlib), iterated circle integrals and torusIntegral, and summation over Fin n → ℕ. The regularity bridge from separate to joint holomorphy and the multi-index power-series API are reusable across the whole series of missions on this book; contributions of either as standalone lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. Lebl, Tasty Bits of Several Complex Variables, version 4.4, 2026, Chapter 1, §§1.1–1.3. https://www.jirka.org/scv/scv.pdf
  • W. F. Osgood, "Note über analytische Functionen mehrerer Veränderlichen", Mathematische Annalen 52 (1899), 462–464.
  • L. Hörmander, An Introduction to Complex Analysis in Several Variables, 3rd ed., North-Holland, 1990, Chapter II.
16 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisPartial Differential Equations·Captain: mikedeng1

Notes on Partial Differential Equations X: Galerkin Existence of Weak Solutions of Parabolic PDEsTextbook

Motivation

Linear second-order parabolic equations such as ut+Lu=fu_t + Lu = fut​+Lu=f model diffusion with advection, growth or decay, and external sources. The heat equation is the prototype. For coefficients that are only bounded and measurable, classical solutions need not exist, and the natural well-posedness theory is the L2L^2L2 energy theory of weak solutions. In that theory the solution is a curve t↦u(t)t \mapsto u(t)t↦u(t) in a Sobolev space, and the equation holds in the dual space. This framework, developed by J.-L. Lions and others in the 1950s–60s (Lions–Magenes 1972), underlies the numerical analysis of parabolic problems through finite elements and spectral Galerkin methods. It also underlies the existence theory for nonlinear evolution equations such as the Navier–Stokes equations (Temam 1977).

This mission formalizes Chapter 6 of J. K. Hunter's Notes on Partial Differential Equations (UC Davis, revised 6/18/2014): the existence, uniqueness and energy estimate for weak solutions of the parabolic initial–boundary value problem, proved by the Galerkin method. It also formalizes the vector-valued calculus on Hilbert triples that the proof rests on, and the Ehrling and Aubin–Lions compactness results of §6.6.

Setting

Let Ω⊂Rn\Omega \subset \mathbb{R}^nΩ⊂Rn be a bounded open set and T>0T > 0T>0. H01(Ω)H^1_0(\Omega)H01​(Ω) is the closure of Cc∞(Ω)C_c^\infty(\Omega)Cc∞​(Ω) in the norm ∥u∥H012=∫Ω(u2+∣Du∣2) dx\|u\|_{H^1_0}^2 = \int_\Omega (u^2 + |Du|^2)\,dx∥u∥H01​2​=∫Ω​(u2+∣Du∣2)dx. H−1(Ω)H^{-1}(\Omega)H−1(Ω) is its dual, with pairing ⟨f,v⟩\langle f, v\rangle⟨f,v⟩. Every u∈L2(Ω)u \in L^2(\Omega)u∈L2(Ω) acts on H01(Ω)H^1_0(\Omega)H01​(Ω) by v↦∫Ωuv dxv \mapsto \int_\Omega uv\,dxv↦∫Ω​uvdx.

The operator is Lu=−∑i,j∂i(aij∂ju)+∑jbj∂ju+cuLu = -\sum_{i,j}\partial_i(a^{ij}\partial_j u) + \sum_j b^j\partial_j u + cuLu=−∑i,j​∂i​(aij∂j​u)+∑j​bj∂j​u+cu. Its coefficients satisfy Assumption 6.1: aij,bj,c∈L∞(Ω×(0,T))a^{ij}, b^j, c \in L^\infty(\Omega\times(0,T))aij,bj,c∈L∞(Ω×(0,T)), aij=ajia^{ij} = a^{ji}aij=aji, and uniform ellipticity ∑aijξiξj≥θ∣ξ∣2\sum a^{ij}\xi_i\xi_j \ge \theta|\xi|^2∑aijξi​ξj​≥θ∣ξ∣2 for some θ>0\theta > 0θ>0. The associated form is

a(u,v;t)=∑i,j∫Ωaij∂iu ∂jv dx+∑j∫Ωbj∂ju v dx+∫Ωc uv dx.a(u, v; t) = \sum_{i,j}\int_\Omega a^{ij}\partial_i u\,\partial_j v\,dx + \sum_j\int_\Omega b^j\partial_j u\,v\,dx + \int_\Omega c\,uv\,dx.a(u,v;t)=i,j∑​∫Ω​aij∂i​u∂j​vdx+j∑​∫Ω​bj∂j​uvdx+∫Ω​cuvdx.

A function u:[0,T]→H01(Ω)u : [0,T] \to H^1_0(\Omega)u:[0,T]→H01​(Ω) has weak time derivative ut=wu_t = wut​=w if ∫0Tϕ′(t)u(t) dt=−∫0Tϕ(t)w(t) dt\int_0^T \phi'(t)u(t)\,dt = -\int_0^T\phi(t)w(t)\,dt∫0T​ϕ′(t)u(t)dt=−∫0T​ϕ(t)w(t)dt for all ϕ∈Cc∞(0,T)\phi \in C_c^\infty(0,T)ϕ∈Cc∞​(0,T), with Bochner integrals in H−1(Ω)H^{-1}(\Omega)H−1(Ω). Given f∈L2(0,T;H−1(Ω))f \in L^2(0,T;H^{-1}(\Omega))f∈L2(0,T;H−1(Ω)) and g∈L2(Ω)g \in L^2(\Omega)g∈L2(Ω), uuu is a weak solution of

ut+Lu=f in Ω×(0,T),u=0 on ∂Ω,u(0)=gu_t + Lu = f \ \text{in } \Omega\times(0,T), \qquad u = 0 \ \text{on } \partial\Omega, \qquad u(0) = gut​+Lu=f in Ω×(0,T),u=0 on ∂Ω,u(0)=g

when three conditions hold. First, u∈L2(0,T;H01)u \in L^2(0,T;H^1_0)u∈L2(0,T;H01​) and ut∈L2(0,T;H−1)u_t \in L^2(0,T;H^{-1})ut​∈L2(0,T;H−1). Second, ⟨ut(t),v⟩+a(u(t),v;t)=⟨f(t),v⟩\langle u_t(t), v\rangle + a(u(t), v; t) = \langle f(t), v\rangle⟨ut​(t),v⟩+a(u(t),v;t)=⟨f(t),v⟩ for every v∈H01(Ω)v \in H^1_0(\Omega)v∈H01​(Ω) and a.e. ttt. Third, u(0)=gu(0) = gu(0)=g, where the value at 000 is that of the continuous representative in C([0,T];L2(Ω))C([0,T];L^2(\Omega))C([0,T];L2(Ω)).

The Galerkin approximations use an L2L^2L2-orthonormal basis {wk}\{w_k\}{wk​} of Dirichlet eigenfunctions and the spaces EN=⟨w1,…,wN⟩E_N = \langle w_1, \dots, w_N\rangleEN​=⟨w1​,…,wN​⟩. The approximation uN:[0,T]→ENu_N : [0,T] \to E_NuN​:[0,T]→EN​ solves the projected equation (uNt,v)L2+a(uN,v;t)=⟨f,v⟩(u_{Nt}, v)_{L^2} + a(u_N, v; t) = \langle f, v\rangle(uNt​,v)L2​+a(uN​,v;t)=⟨f,v⟩ for v∈ENv \in E_Nv∈EN​, with uN(0)=PNgu_N(0) = P_N guN​(0)=PN​g.

A Hilbert triple V↪H↪V′\mathcal{V} \hookrightarrow \mathcal{H} \hookrightarrow \mathcal{V}'V↪H↪V′ consists of two separable Hilbert spaces V\mathcal{V}V, H\mathcal{H}H and the dual V′\mathcal{V}'V′, with dense continuous injective embeddings and ⟨f,v⟩=(f,v)H\langle f, v\rangle = (f, v)_{\mathcal{H}}⟨f,v⟩=(f,v)H​ for f∈Hf \in \mathcal{H}f∈H. The model is H01↪L2↪H−1H^1_0 \hookrightarrow L^2 \hookrightarrow H^{-1}H01​↪L2↪H−1.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.3

For every f∈L2(0,T;H−1(Ω))f \in L^2(0,T;H^{-1}(\Omega))f∈L2(0,T;H−1(Ω)) and g∈L2(Ω)g \in L^2(\Omega)g∈L2(Ω) there is a unique weak solution u∈C([0,T];L2)∩L2(0,T;H01)u \in C([0,T];L^2) \cap L^2(0,T;H^1_0)u∈C([0,T];L2)∩L2(0,T;H01​) with ut∈L2(0,T;H−1)u_t \in L^2(0,T;H^{-1})ut​∈L2(0,T;H−1). There is also a constant C=C(Ω,T,L)C = C(\Omega, T, L)C=C(Ω,T,L) such that

∥u∥L∞(0,T;L2)+∥u∥L2(0,T;H01)+∥ut∥L2(0,T;H−1)≤C(∥f∥L2(0,T;H−1)+∥g∥L2).\|u\|_{L^\infty(0,T;L^2)} + \|u\|_{L^2(0,T;H^1_0)} + \|u_t\|_{L^2(0,T;H^{-1})} \le C\big(\|f\|_{L^2(0,T;H^{-1})} + \|g\|_{L^2}\big).∥u∥L∞(0,T;L2)​+∥u∥L2(0,T;H01​)​+∥ut​∥L2(0,T;H−1)​≤C(∥f∥L2(0,T;H−1)​+∥g∥L2​).

Milestones

  • Theorem 6.41. If u∈L2(0,T;V)u \in L^2(0,T;\mathcal{V})u∈L2(0,T;V) and ut∈L2(0,T;V′)u_t \in L^2(0,T;\mathcal{V}')ut​∈L2(0,T;V′), then u∈C([0,T];H)u \in C([0,T];\mathcal{H})u∈C([0,T];H). Moreover ddt(u,v)H=⟨ut,v⟩\frac{d}{dt}(u,v)_{\mathcal{H}} = \langle u_t, v\rangledtd​(u,v)H​=⟨ut​,v⟩, ddt∥u∥H2=2⟨ut,u⟩\frac{d}{dt}\|u\|^2_{\mathcal{H}} = 2\langle u_t, u\rangledtd​∥u∥H2​=2⟨ut​,u⟩, and ∥u∥L∞(H)≤C(∥u∥L2(V)+∥ut∥L2(V′))\|u\|_{L^\infty(\mathcal{H})} \le C(\|u\|_{L^2(\mathcal{V})} + \|u_t\|_{L^2(\mathcal{V}')})∥u∥L∞(H)​≤C(∥u∥L2(V)​+∥ut​∥L2(V′)​).
  • Theorem 6.42. ∫0T⟨ut,v⟩ dt=(u(T),v(T))H−(u(0),v(0))H−∫0T⟨u,vt⟩ dt\int_0^T\langle u_t, v\rangle\,dt = (u(T),v(T))_{\mathcal{H}} - (u(0),v(0))_{\mathcal{H}} - \int_0^T\langle u, v_t\rangle\,dt∫0T​⟨ut​,v⟩dt=(u(T),v(T))H​−(u(0),v(0))H​−∫0T​⟨u,vt​⟩dt.
  • Proposition 6.5. Each Galerkin problem has a unique solution uNu_NuN​.
  • Proposition 6.6. The energy estimate above holds for uNu_NuN​ with CCC independent of NNN.
  • Proposition 6.7. A subsequence of uNu_NuN​ converges weakly to a weak solution satisfying the estimate.
  • Lemma 6.10 (Ehrling) and Theorem 6.9 (Aubin–Lions). These are further results of the chapter, stated for Banach spaces X↪Y↪ZX \hookrightarrow Y \hookrightarrow ZX↪Y↪Z with XXX compactly embedded in YYY.

Significance

Theorem 6.3 is the basic well-posedness theorem for linear parabolic equations with rough coefficients. It gives existence and uniqueness, and continuous dependence on the data through the linear estimate. The same argument gives the Galerkin convergence that justifies spectral and finite-element semi-discretizations. The Hilbert-triple calculus of Theorems 6.41–6.42 is the standard setting for linear and nonlinear evolution equations. The Aubin–Lions lemma is the compactness tool for nonlinear problems, such as the semilinear heat equation of §6.6 and the Navier–Stokes equations of §6.7.

All of these results are classical and proved in the notes, except that Theorem 6.41's proof leans on vector-valued mollification. As far as a search of the platform shows, none of them is formalized there. Mathlib has the Bochner integral, LpL^pLp spaces of Banach-valued functions and Gronwall's inequality. It does not have weak derivatives of vector-valued functions, Hilbert triples, or evolution-equation existence theorems. The work here is therefore to formalize known proofs, and in doing so to build reusable infrastructure for time-dependent PDEs.

Difficulty

The main obstacle is that the natural objects are equivalence classes of vector-valued functions, not functions. The initial condition u(0)=gu(0) = gu(0)=g is meaningless for an element of L2(0,T;H01)L^2(0,T;H^1_0)L2(0,T;H01​) until Theorem 6.41 provides a continuous representative. Its proof needs extension across the endpoints and mollification of V\mathcal{V}V-valued functions. Passing to the limit in the Galerkin scheme needs weak compactness in L2(0,T;H01)L^2(0,T;H^1_0)L2(0,T;H01​) and L2(0,T;H−1)L^2(0,T;H^{-1})L2(0,T;H−1), identified with a dual Bochner space. Proposition 6.5 is a linear ODE system whose coefficients are only L∞L^\inftyL∞ in time, so the Picard–Lindelöf theorem for continuous right-hand sides does not apply directly. The H−1H^{-1}H−1 bound on uNtu_{Nt}uNt​ needs the projection PNP_NPN​ to be bounded on H01H^1_0H01​ as well as on L2L^2L2, which is why the basis is taken to be eigenfunctions. Uniqueness needs the energy identity (6.46) and a Gronwall argument in weak form.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), with 0-based coordinates. H10 n Ω is the closure of the jets (ϕ,∇ϕ)(\phi, \nabla\phi)(ϕ,∇ϕ), ϕ∈Cc∞(Ω)\phi \in C_c^\infty(\Omega)ϕ∈Cc∞​(Ω), in L2(Ω;R×Rn)L^2(\Omega;\mathbb{R}\times\mathbb{R}^n)L2(Ω;R×Rn), so its norm is the full H1H^1H1 norm. Hm1 n Ω is StrongDual ℝ (H10 n Ω). l2Embed is the embedding H01↪L2↪H−1H^1_0 \hookrightarrow L^2 \hookrightarrow H^{-1}H01​↪L2↪H−1.
  • Lp(0,T;X)L^p(0,T;X)Lp(0,T;X) is MemLp for Lebesgue measure on (0,T)(0,T)(0,T), and norms are eLpNorm with values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. Constants are finite nonnegative reals. Every constant is quantified before the data it must not depend on: before fff, ggg in Theorem 6.3, and before the basis, fff, ggg, NNN in Propositions 6.6–6.7.
  • The weak time derivative is (6.14) in its standard form ∫ϕ′u=−∫ϕw\int\phi' u = -\int\phi w∫ϕ′u=−∫ϕw. The page prints ϕ\phiϕ and ϕ′\phi'ϕ′ interchanged, which is a typo.
  • Weak solutions take g∈L2(Ω)g \in L^2(\Omega)g∈L2(Ω) as in Assumption 6.1(3). The printed Theorem 6.3 says g∈H01(Ω)g \in H^1_0(\Omega)g∈H01​(Ω), a special case. u(0)=gu(0) = gu(0)=g is read through a continuous representative u~∈C([0,T];L2)\tilde u \in C([0,T];L^2)u~∈C([0,T];L2), and uniqueness means equality for a.e. ttt.
  • Coefficient conditions and ellipticity hold almost everywhere on Ω×(0,T)\Omega\times(0,T)Ω×(0,T). The Galerkin basis is a hypothesis: an orthonormal basis of L2(Ω)L^2(\Omega)L2(Ω) of weak Dirichlet eigenfunctions.
  • Proposition 6.7 states weak convergence of uNku_{N_k}uNk​​ in L2(0,T;H01)L^2(0,T;H^1_0)L2(0,T;H01​) and of uNktu_{N_k t}uNk​t​ in L2(0,T;H−1)L^2(0,T;H^{-1})L2(0,T;H−1), in the explicit integral form of p. 186. This is at least as strong as the printed claim.
  • Hilbert triples are structures with two continuous injective dense-range embeddings, separability, and the compatibility identity. Reflexivity in Theorem 6.9 is surjectivity of the canonical map into the bidual.
  • Ruling out trivializations. Every Bochner integral in a definition has an integrable integrand under the stated L2L^2L2 hypotheses, so no weak-derivative or weak-solution condition holds through the integral's junk value 000. The initial condition is imposed on a continuous representative, so it is not vacuous on a null set.
  • Reusable infrastructure welcome: vector-valued mollification and extension, the Hilbert-triple calculus, and dual identification of L2(0,T;X)′L^2(0,T;X)'L2(0,T;X)′.

Selected references

  • J. K. Hunter, Notes on Partial Differential Equations, UC Davis lecture notes, revised 6/18/2014, Chapter 6. https://www.math.ucdavis.edu/~hunter/pdes/pde_notes.pdf
  • L. C. Evans, Partial Differential Equations, 2nd ed., Graduate Studies in Mathematics 19, AMS, 2010, §7.1. https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/019
  • J.-L. Lions and E. Magenes, Non-Homogeneous Boundary Value Problems and Applications I, Springer, 1972. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-65161-8
  • R. Temam, Navier–Stokes Equations: Theory and Numerical Analysis, North-Holland, 1977; AMS Chelsea reprint 2001. https://doi.org/10.1090/chel/343
  • J. Simon, Compact sets in the space Lp(0,T;B)L^p(0,T;B)Lp(0,T;B), Ann. Mat. Pura Appl. 146 (1987), 65–96. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01762360
17 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Functional AnalysisPartial Differential Equations·Captain: mikedeng1

Notes on Partial Differential Equations VIII: Strongly Continuous Semigroups and the Lumer–Phillips TheoremTextbook

Motivation

Many linear partial differential equations of evolution type — the heat equation, the Schrödinger equation, linear wave and Klein–Gordon equations, linearized reaction–diffusion and Kuramoto–Sivashinsky equations — can be written as an ordinary differential equation

ut=Au,u(0)=f,u_t = Au, \qquad u(0) = f,ut​=Au,u(0)=f,

in a Banach space XXX of functions, where AAA is a spatial differential operator. When AAA is bounded, the solution is the operator exponential etAfe^{tA}fetAf. Differential operators are unbounded, however, and then the solution operators f↦u(t)f \mapsto u(t)f↦u(t) are only continuous in time in the strong sense and may exist only forward in time. Semigroup theory makes this picture rigorous: it characterizes exactly which operators AAA generate a well-posed evolution, and it is the standard route from energy estimates to existence and uniqueness for linear and semilinear evolution equations (Duhamel's formula, §5.4.5 of the notes, used for the semilinear heat equation in §5.5).

This mission formalizes §5.4 of J. K. Hunter's Notes on Partial Differential Equations (UC Davis, revised 6/18/2014): uniformly continuous groups, strongly continuous semigroups and their generators, the Hille–Yosida theorem, the Lumer–Phillips theorem and Stone's theorem.

Timeline. The generation theorem for contraction semigroups is due independently to E. Hille (1948) and K. Yosida (1948); the general version with constants MMM, aaa to Feller, Miyadera and Phillips (1952–53). G. Lumer and R. S. Phillips (1961) recast the contraction case in terms of dissipative operators. Stone's theorem on one-parameter unitary groups dates from 1930–32. Standard modern accounts are Pazy (1983) and Engel–Nagel (2000).

Setting

Let XXX be a Banach space over K=R\mathbb{K} = \mathbb{R}K=R or C\mathbb{C}C, and L(X)\mathcal{L}(X)L(X) the Banach space of bounded linear operators on XXX with the operator norm.

A uniformly continuous group is a family {T(t):t∈R}⊂L(X)\{T(t) : t \in \mathbb{R}\} \subset \mathcal{L}(X){T(t):t∈R}⊂L(X) with T(0)=IT(0) = IT(0)=I, T(s)T(t)=T(s+t)T(s)T(t) = T(s+t)T(s)T(t)=T(s+t), and T(h)→IT(h) \to IT(h)→I in operator norm as h→0h \to 0h→0. A strongly continuous (C₀) semigroup is a family {T(t):t≥0}⊂L(X)\{T(t) : t \ge 0\} \subset \mathcal{L}(X){T(t):t≥0}⊂L(X) with T(0)=IT(0) = IT(0)=I, T(s)T(t)=T(s+t)T(s)T(t) = T(s+t)T(s)T(t)=T(s+t) for s,t≥0s, t \ge 0s,t≥0, and T(h)f→fT(h)f \to fT(h)f→f as h→0+h \to 0^+h→0+ for every f∈Xf \in Xf∈X; it is a contraction semigroup if ∥T(t)∥≤1\|T(t)\| \le 1∥T(t)∥≤1 for all t≥0t \ge 0t≥0. A C₀ group has the same properties for all s,t∈Rs, t \in \mathbb{R}s,t∈R; on a complex Hilbert space it is unitary if every T(t)T(t)T(t) is unitary.

An operator A:D(A)⊂X→XA : \mathcal{D}(A) \subset X \to XA:D(A)⊂X→X is a linear map defined on a subspace D(A)\mathcal{D}(A)D(A). The generator of a C₀ semigroup is the operator AAA whose domain is the set of fff for which

Af=lim⁡h→0+T(h)f−fhAf = \lim_{h \to 0^+} \frac{T(h)f - f}{h}Af=h→0+lim​hT(h)f−f​

exists in norm, with AfAfAf this limit. AAA is closed if its graph {(f,Af):f∈D(A)}\{(f, Af) : f \in \mathcal{D}(A)\}{(f,Af):f∈D(A)} is closed in X×XX \times XX×X, and densely defined if D(A)\mathcal{D}(A)D(A) is dense. A scalar λ\lambdaλ is in the resolvent set of AAA if λI−A:D(A)→X\lambda I - A : \mathcal{D}(A) \to XλI−A:D(A)→X is a bijection, and then R(λ,A)=(λI−A)−1R(\lambda, A) = (\lambda I - A)^{-1}R(λ,A)=(λI−A)−1 is the resolvent. AAA is dissipative if λ∥f∥≤∥(λI−A)f∥\lambda\|f\| \le \|(\lambda I - A)f\|λ∥f∥≤∥(λI−A)f∥ for all real λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 and f∈D(A)f \in \mathcal{D}(A)f∈D(A), and m-dissipative if in addition λI−A\lambda I - AλI−A is onto XXX for some λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0. On a complex Hilbert space H\mathcal{H}H, AAA is self-adjoint if D(A)\mathcal{D}(A)D(A) is dense, D(A)=D(A∗)\mathcal{D}(A) = \mathcal{D}(A^*)D(A)=D(A∗), and (x,Ay)=(Ax,y)(x, Ay) = (Ax, y)(x,Ay)=(Ax,y) for x,y∈D(A)x, y \in \mathcal{D}(A)x,y∈D(A).

Formalization targets

Goal: the Lumer–Phillips theorem (Theorem 5.38)

For an operator A:D(A)⊂X→XA : \mathcal{D}(A) \subset X \to XA:D(A)⊂X→X,

A generates a C₀ contraction semigroup on X  ⟺  A is closed, densely defined and m-dissipative.A \text{ generates a C₀ contraction semigroup on } X \iff A \text{ is closed, densely defined and m-dissipative.}A generates a C₀ contraction semigroup on X⟺A is closed, densely defined and m-dissipative.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 5.24. A uniformly continuous group is smooth in operator norm, A=T′(0)∈L(X)A = T'(0) \in \mathcal{L}(X)A=T′(0)∈L(X) exists, and T(t)=etAT(t) = e^{tA}T(t)=etA for all t∈Rt \in \mathbb{R}t∈R.
  2. Theorem 5.32. The generator of a C₀ semigroup is closed and densely defined.
  3. Theorem 5.35 (Hille–Yosida). AAA generates a C₀ semigroup if and only if, for some M≥1M \ge 1M≥1 and a∈Ra \in \mathbb{R}a∈R, AAA is closed and densely defined, (a,∞)(a, \infty)(a,∞) lies in the resolvent set, and
∥R(λ,A)n∥≤M(λ−a)n(λ>a, n∈N);\|R(\lambda, A)^n\| \le \frac{M}{(\lambda - a)^n} \qquad (\lambda > a,\ n \in \mathbb{N});∥R(λ,A)n∥≤(λ−a)nM​(λ>a, n∈N);

in that case ∥T(t)∥≤Meat\|T(t)\| \le M e^{at}∥T(t)∥≤Meat for t≥0t \ge 0t≥0. 4. Corollary 5.36. The contraction case: M=1M = 1M=1, a=0a = 0a=0, with ∥R(λ,A)∥≤1/λ\|R(\lambda, A)\| \le 1/\lambda∥R(λ,A)∥≤1/λ. 5. Theorem 5.42 (Stone). On a complex Hilbert space, iAiAiA generates a C₀ unitary group if and only if AAA is self-adjoint.

Significance

The result itself. The Lumer–Phillips theorem is the working form of generation theory for PDEs: to show that ut=Auu_t = Auut​=Au is well posed with ∥u(t)∥≤∥u(0)∥\|u(t)\| \le \|u(0)\|∥u(t)∥≤∥u(0)∥, it suffices to prove an energy inequality (dissipativity) and to solve a single resolvent equation λf−Af=g\lambda f - Af = gλf−Af=g. The notes apply it to the Laplacian on H2(Rn)⊂L2(Rn)H^2(\mathbb{R}^n) \subset L^2(\mathbb{R}^n)H2(Rn)⊂L2(Rn) and, after a shift, to the linearized Kuramoto–Sivashinsky operator; later chapters use the resulting semigroups in Duhamel's formula to construct solutions of semilinear heat and Schrödinger equations. Hille–Yosida gives the general growth bound ∥T(t)∥≤Meat\|T(t)\| \le Me^{at}∥T(t)∥≤Meat, and Stone's theorem identifies unitary quantum dynamics with self-adjoint Hamiltonians.

Formalizing it. All results are classical and proved in the literature; the notes themselves state 5.32, 5.35, 5.36, 5.38 and 5.42 without proof, referring to standard texts. Mathlib currently has the operator exponential on Banach algebras, partially defined linear maps (LinearPMap) with closedness, closures and adjoints, but no theory of C₀ semigroups or their generators. A complete development would give Lean a reusable generation theory for unbounded operators, on which parabolic and dispersive PDE existence results can rest.

Difficulty

The central obstacle is the passage from resolvent information to a semigroup. Formally T(t)=etAT(t) = e^{tA}T(t)=etA, but for unbounded AAA the exponential series is meaningless, and the necessity directions require showing that the resolvent is a Laplace transform of the semigroup, which needs integration of strongly (not norm) continuous operator-valued functions. The sufficiency directions must construct a semigroup from AAA by an approximation of the unbounded generator and a limit that converges only strongly, and then identify the generator of the limit with AAA — including its domain, which is where most careless arguments fail. In the Lumer–Phillips theorem, surjectivity of λI−A\lambda I - AλI−A is assumed for a single λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0 and must be propagated to every λ>0\lambda > 0λ>0. In Stone's theorem both directions need domain arguments for unbounded operators on Hilbert space; symmetry of AAA alone is not enough.

Formalization scope

  • Scalars: a field 𝕜 with [RCLike 𝕜] (ℝ or ℂ), and X a Banach space over it ([NormedAddCommGroup X] [NormedSpace 𝕜 X] [CompleteSpace X]). Stone's theorem is over ℂ on an InnerProductSpace ℂ H with [CompleteSpace H]. Theorem 5.24 additionally equips X with a compatible real structure ([NormedSpace ℝ X] [IsScalarTower ℝ 𝕜 X]) so that t↦T(t)t \mapsto T(t)t↦T(t) can be differentiated; etAe^{tA}etA is Mathlib's NormedSpace.exp, and C∞C^\inftyC∞ is ContDiff ℝ ∞.
  • Operators A:D(A)⊂X→XA : \mathcal{D}(A) \subset X \to XA:D(A)⊂X→X are X →ₗ.[𝕜] X (LinearPMap); closedness is LinearPMap.IsClosed (closed graph).
  • Semigroups are functions T : ℝ → X →L[𝕜] X; for semigroups only the values at t≥0t \ge 0t≥0 enter. Composition is multiplication in X →L[𝕜] X.
  • The generator relation IsGenerator T A states, for all f,gf, gf,g: the right difference quotient h−1(T(h)f−f)h^{-1}(T(h)f - f)h−1(T(h)f−f) tends to ggg as h→0+h \to 0^+h→0+ if and only if f∈D(A)f \in \mathcal{D}(A)f∈D(A) and Af=gAf = gAf=g. So "AAA generates a semigroup" means that AAA equals the generator including its domain; a formalization in which AAA merely agrees with the limit on some subspace, or in which the generator is a restriction, would make the theorems different (and false) statements, and is ruled out.
  • Resolvent norm bounds ∥R(λ,A)n∥≤c\|R(\lambda, A)^n\| \le c∥R(λ,A)n∥≤c are stated pointwise, ∥R(λ,A)ng∥≤c∥g∥\|R(\lambda,A)^n g\| \le c\|g\|∥R(λ,A)ng∥≤c∥g∥ for all ggg, which is equivalent. In (5.24) n=0n = 0n=0 is included, which adds nothing because M≥1M \ge 1M≥1. The "in that case" clause of Theorem 5.35 is a second conjunct: for every semigroup generated by AAA and every M,aM, aM,a satisfying the three conditions, ∥T(t)∥≤Meat\|T(t)\| \le Me^{at}∥T(t)∥≤Meat.
  • Closedness and density, which the notes build into the definitions of the resolvent set and of dissipativity, are stated explicitly wherever they are used (they appear as condition (1) in every theorem).
  • The generator of a C₀ group (Stone) is the generator of its forward part, as in Definition 5.30; the operator iAiAiA is Complex.I • A, with the same domain as AAA. Self-adjointness is Definition 5.41 as printed, not Mathlib's IsSelfAdjoint for LinearPMap, although the two agree.
  • Useful infrastructure, reusable beyond this mission: Riemann/Bochner integration of strongly continuous operator families, the Laplace-transform representation of the resolvent, Yosida approximations, and dissipativity–resolvent equivalences. Contributions of any of these as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. K. Hunter, Notes on Partial Differential Equations, UC Davis lecture notes, revised 6/18/2014, §5.4. https://www.math.ucdavis.edu/~hunter/pdes/pde_notes.pdf
  • A. Pazy, Semigroups of Linear Operators and Applications to Partial Differential Equations, Springer, 1983. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4612-5561-1
  • K.-J. Engel and R. Nagel, One-Parameter Semigroups for Linear Evolution Equations, Springer GTM 194, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1007/b97696
  • G. Lumer and R. S. Phillips, Dissipative operators in a Banach space, Pacific J. Math. 11 (1961), 679–698. https://doi.org/10.2140/pjm.1961.11.679
  • M. H. Stone, On one-parameter unitary groups in Hilbert space, Ann. of Math. 33 (1932), 643–648. https://doi.org/10.2307/1968538
  • K. Yosida, On the differentiability and the representation of one-parameter semigroup of linear operators, J. Math. Soc. Japan 1 (1948), 15–21. https://doi.org/10.2969/jmsj/00110015
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Harmonic AnalysisPartial Differential Equations·Captain: mikedeng1

Notes on Partial Differential Equations II: The Newtonian Potential and Hölder Estimates for Poisson's EquationTextbook

Motivation

Poisson's equation −Δu=f-\Delta u = f−Δu=f is the model elliptic partial differential equation. It describes the electrostatic potential of a charge density, the gravitational potential of a mass density, and the steady temperature of a body with internal heat sources. Its solution on the whole space by convolution with a point-source potential, and the fact that this solution has exactly two more derivatives than the data when smoothness is measured in Hölder norms, are the starting point of the regularity theory of second-order elliptic equations.

This mission formalizes §2.6–2.7 of J. K. Hunter's Notes on Partial Differential Equations (UC Davis, revised 6/18/2014), which follow the classical line: the fundamental solution, the Newtonian potential, an integral representation of its second derivatives, and the Hölder estimate. The estimate goes back to J. Schauder (1934), who used it to build an existence theory for elliptic equations with Hölder continuous coefficients, now called Schauder theory (Gilbarg–Trudinger, Ch. 4 and 6). The singular integral operators that appear in the second derivatives were later placed in a general framework by A. P. Calderón and A. Zygmund (1952), whose theory gives the LpL^pLp analogue.

Setting

Throughout, n≥2n \ge 2n≥2 and Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn carries the Euclidean norm ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ and Lebesgue measure. Let αn\alpha_nαn​ be the volume of the open unit ball. The fundamental solution of Laplace's equation is

Γ(x)=1n(n−2)αn 1∣x∣n−2(n≥3),Γ(x)=−12πlog⁡∣x∣(n=2),\Gamma(x) = \frac{1}{n(n-2)\alpha_n}\,\frac{1}{|x|^{n-2}} \quad (n \ge 3), \qquad \Gamma(x) = -\frac{1}{2\pi}\log|x| \quad (n = 2),Γ(x)=n(n−2)αn​1​∣x∣n−21​(n≥3),Γ(x)=−2π1​log∣x∣(n=2),

defined for x≠0x \neq 0x=0. With this sign convention (as in Evans, opposite to Gilbarg–Trudinger) Γ\GammaΓ is harmonic away from the origin and −ΔΓ=δ-\Delta\Gamma = \delta−ΔΓ=δ in the sense of distributions. Γ\GammaΓ is locally integrable, and so is its gradient, but its second derivatives behave like ∣x∣−n|x|^{-n}∣x∣−n and are not.

For a smooth function fff with compact support, f∈Cc∞(Rn)f \in C_c^\infty(\mathbb{R}^n)f∈Cc∞​(Rn), the Newtonian potential of fff is the convolution

u(x)=(Γ∗f)(x)=∫RnΓ(x−y) f(y) dy.u(x) = (\Gamma * f)(x) = \int_{\mathbb{R}^n} \Gamma(x - y)\, f(y)\, dy.u(x)=(Γ∗f)(x)=∫Rn​Γ(x−y)f(y)dy.

Partial derivatives are written ∂i\partial_i∂i​, with ∂ij=∂i∂j\partial_{ij} = \partial_i \partial_j∂ij​=∂i​∂j​, and δij\delta_{ij}δij​ is the Kronecker delta. For 0<α≤10 < \alpha \le 10<α≤1 the Hölder seminorm of v:Rn→Rv : \mathbb{R}^n \to \mathbb{R}v:Rn→R is

[v]0,α=sup⁡x≠y∣v(x)−v(y)∣∣x−y∣α∈[0,∞].[v]_{0,\alpha} = \sup_{x \neq y} \frac{|v(x) - v(y)|}{|x - y|^{\alpha}} \in [0, \infty].[v]0,α​=x=ysup​∣x−y∣α∣v(x)−v(y)∣​∈[0,∞].

In the Lean development these objects are fundamentalSolution n, unitBallVolume n, newtonianPotential n f, partialDeriv u i, secondPartial u i j and holderSeminorm α Set.univ v, all in the namespace HunterPDE.Newtonian.

Formalization targets

Goal: the Hölder estimate (Theorem 2.28)

For 0<α<10 < \alpha < 10<α<1 there is a constant CCC, depending only on α\alphaα and nnn, such that for every f∈Cc∞(Rn)f \in C_c^\infty(\mathbb{R}^n)f∈Cc∞​(Rn) and all indices i,ji, ji,j,

[∂ij(Γ∗f)]0,α≤C [f]0,α.[\partial_{ij}(\Gamma * f)]_{0,\alpha} \le C\,[f]_{0,\alpha}.[∂ij​(Γ∗f)]0,α​≤C[f]0,α​.

The constant is not specified: the goal asserts the shape of the estimate, not a numerical value.

Milestones

  1. Eq. (2.14). Γ\GammaΓ is C∞C^\inftyC∞ on Rn∖{0}\mathbb{R}^n \setminus \{0\}Rn∖{0} and ∂iΓ(x)=−1nαn1∣x∣n−1xi∣x∣\partial_i\Gamma(x) = -\dfrac{1}{n\alpha_n}\dfrac{1}{|x|^{n-1}}\dfrac{x_i}{|x|}∂i​Γ(x)=−nαn​1​∣x∣n−11​∣x∣xi​​ for x≠0x \neq 0x=0.
  2. Eq. (2.23). Γ∗(Δf)=−f\Gamma * (\Delta f) = -fΓ∗(Δf)=−f for f∈Cc∞(Rn)f \in C_c^\infty(\mathbb{R}^n)f∈Cc∞​(Rn).
  3. Theorem 2.25. u=Γ∗fu = \Gamma * fu=Γ∗f is well defined, u∈C∞(Rn)u \in C^\infty(\mathbb{R}^n)u∈C∞(Rn), and −Δu=f-\Delta u = f−Δu=f.
  4. Corollary 2.27. For every xxx and every open ball BR(x)B_R(x)BR​(x) containing the support of fff,
∂iju(x)=∫BR(x)∂ijΓ(x−y) [f(y)−f(x)] dy−1nf(x) δij,\partial_{ij} u(x) = \int_{B_R(x)} \partial_{ij}\Gamma(x - y)\,[f(y) - f(x)]\,dy - \frac{1}{n} f(x)\,\delta_{ij},∂ij​u(x)=∫BR​(x)​∂ij​Γ(x−y)[f(y)−f(x)]dy−n1​f(x)δij​,

with the integral absolutely convergent.

Significance

Theorem 2.25 is the existence theorem for Poisson's equation on the whole space. Corollary 2.27 expresses D2uD^2 uD2u as a singular integral operator applied to fff plus a multiple of fff; it is the prototype of the representations behind both the Hölder (Schauder) and the LpL^pLp (Calderón–Zygmund) theories. Theorem 2.28 is the first Schauder estimate. With it, a priori estimates for equations with variable Hölder coefficients follow by freezing the coefficients, and existence follows by the method of continuity. The notes point out that the Hölder scale is essential: there are continuous compactly supported fff for which Γ∗f\Gamma * fΓ∗f is not C2C^2C2, so no estimate of D2uD^2 uD2u by the maximum of ∣f∣|f|∣f∣ holds. The endpoint α=1\alpha = 1α=1 is excluded from the theorem.

All four statements are classical and proved in the notes; none is new mathematics. As far as the Prove2Me corpus and Mathlib show, none has been machine-checked. Mathlib has the Laplacian on inner product spaces, convolution, and the volume of Euclidean balls, but no fundamental solution of the Laplacian in general dimension, no Newtonian potential, and no Hölder estimates for it. A formalization would supply reusable infrastructure: the fundamental solution with its derivative formulas, differentiation under the integral sign with a locally integrable kernel, and estimates for kernels homogeneous of degree −n-n−n with mean zero on spheres.

Difficulty

The obvious route to the second derivatives, differentiating twice under the integral sign, fails: ∂ijΓ\partial_{ij}\Gamma∂ij​Γ is of order ∣x∣−n|x|^{-n}∣x∣−n near the origin and is not locally integrable, so ∫∂ijΓ(x−y)f(y) dy\int \partial_{ij}\Gamma(x-y) f(y)\,dy∫∂ij​Γ(x−y)f(y)dy need not exist. Corollary 2.27 is precisely the statement that the correct formula carries a subtracted value f(x)f(x)f(x) and a boundary contribution −1nf(x)δij-\frac1n f(x)\delta_{ij}−n1​f(x)δij​, and computing that contribution needs integrals over spheres, which Mathlib supports only indirectly. For the goal, a pointwise bound on the kernel is not enough. Estimating ∣∂ijΓ(x−y)∣ ∣f(y)−f(x)∣|\partial_{ij}\Gamma(x-y)|\,|f(y)-f(x)|∣∂ij​Γ(x−y)∣∣f(y)−f(x)∣ in absolute value gives a bound that grows with the radius of the ball containing the support of fff, while the theorem's constant must be uniform over all fff, all indices and all pairs of points. The estimate depends on cancellation in the kernel, and the maximum-norm version of the same statement is false.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with volume. Every theorem assumes 2 ≤ n; the definition of Γ\GammaΓ returns junk values for n=0,1n = 0, 1n=0,1, which the book excludes.
  • Γ(0)\Gamma(0)Γ(0) is undefined in the book; in Lean it equals 000 (from 1/0=01/0 = 01/0=0 and log⁡0=0\log 0 = 0log0=0), one point of measure zero.
  • Coordinates are 0-based (i : Fin n). ∂iu(x)\partial_i u(x)∂i​u(x) is fderiv ℝ u x (EuclideanSpace.single i 1), and ∂iju=∂i(∂ju)\partial_{ij} u = \partial_i(\partial_j u)∂ij​u=∂i​(∂j​u). fderiv is 000 where uuu is not differentiable, so ∂ijΓ(x−y)\partial_{ij}\Gamma(x-y)∂ij​Γ(x−y) in Corollary 2.27 has an arbitrary value at the single point y=xy = xy=x.
  • "Smooth" is ContDiff ℝ ∞ (C∞C^\inftyC∞). In this Mathlib ContDiff ℝ ⊤ means analytic, and it is not used. Compact support is HasCompactSupport, and "the support of fff" is the closed support tsupport f.
  • Δ\DeltaΔ is Mathlib's InnerProductSpace.laplacian.
  • The convolution Γ∗f\Gamma * fΓ∗f is the Lebesgue integral ∫Γ(x−y)f(y) dy\int \Gamma(x-y) f(y)\,dy∫Γ(x−y)f(y)dy, with no integrability assumed of Γ\GammaΓ. Lean's Bochner integral is 000 for a non-integrable integrand, so Theorem 2.25 asserts integrability of y↦Γ(x−y)f(y)y \mapsto \Gamma(x-y)f(y)y↦Γ(x−y)f(y) for every xxx, and Corollary 2.27 asserts integrability of its integrand on the ball. Both are true and are implicit in the book's formulas; they rule out reading an identity between junk values as the theorem.
  • The Hölder seminorm is a supremum in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] over all pairs of distinct points of Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, not Mathlib's HolderWith, which fixes a constant. In the goal CCC is a finite nonnegative real quantified before fff, iii and jjj. The inequality therefore also asserts that ∂iju\partial_{ij} u∂ij​u is uniformly α\alphaα-Hölder, because [f]0,α<∞[f]_{0,\alpha} < \infty[f]0,α​<∞ for f∈Cc∞f \in C_c^\inftyf∈Cc∞​. A formalization that takes CCC after fff, lets it depend on the support of fff, or includes the excluded endpoint α=1\alpha = 1α=1 is not the theorem.
  • Theorem 2.26 of the notes (the same representation over an arbitrary smooth domain, with a surface integral over ∂Ω\partial\Omega∂Ω) is not stated, because a faithful statement needs a surface measure on general smooth boundaries. The singular-integral discussion of §2.8 is commentary and is not stated.

Useful infrastructure, all reusable beyond this mission: differentiation of Γ\GammaΓ away from the origin; integration in polar coordinates and integrals of ∣x∣−a|x|^{-a}∣x∣−a over balls and annuli; surface integrals over spheres, or the divergence theorem on balls; differentiation under the integral sign for convolutions with a locally integrable kernel. Contributions of any of these as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. K. Hunter, Notes on Partial Differential Equations, UC Davis lecture notes, revised 6/18/2014, §2.6–2.8 and Definition 1.1. https://www.math.ucdavis.edu/~hunter/pdes/pde_notes.pdf
  • L. C. Evans, Partial Differential Equations, 2nd ed., Graduate Studies in Mathematics 19, AMS, 2010, §2.2. https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/019
  • D. Gilbarg and N. S. Trudinger, Elliptic Partial Differential Equations of Second Order, Springer, 2001 (reprint of the 1998 ed.), Ch. 4. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-61798-0
  • J. Schauder, Über lineare elliptische Differentialgleichungen zweiter Ordnung, Mathematische Zeitschrift 38 (1934), 257–282. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01170635
  • A. P. Calderón and A. Zygmund, On the existence of certain singular integrals, Acta Mathematica 88 (1952), 85–139. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02392130
36 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Partial Differential Equations·Captain: mikedeng1

Notes on Partial Differential Equations I: Mean Values, Maximum Principles and Analyticity of Harmonic FunctionsTextbook

Motivation

Laplace's equation Δu=0\Delta u = 0Δu=0 is the prototype of an elliptic partial differential equation. Its solutions, the harmonic functions, describe equilibrium states in potential theory (gravitation, electrostatics, steady heat flow), are the real and imaginary parts of holomorphic functions in the plane, and are the stationary states of Brownian motion. Many qualitative properties of general elliptic equations — interior smoothing, maximum principles, Harnack-type inequalities — are first seen, and most cleanly proved, for the Laplacian.

This mission covers §2.1–2.3 of J. K. Hunter's Notes on Partial Differential Equations (UC Davis lecture notes, revised 6/18/2014, author's copy), which follow Evans, Partial Differential Equations, §2.2 (AMS GSM 19) and Gilbarg–Trudinger, Elliptic Partial Differential Equations of Second Order, Ch. 2 (Springer). The chain runs from the mean value property to interior derivative estimates with explicit constants and ends with the real-analyticity of harmonic functions in any dimension; the maximum principles and Liouville's theorem are consequences on the same definitions. The results are classical (Gauss, Liouville, Weyl, Harnack; nineteenth and early twentieth century) and are in every graduate PDE course.

Setting

Fix n∈Nn \in \mathbb{N}n∈N and write Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn for Euclidean space with Lebesgue measure. For x∈Rnx \in \mathbb{R}^nx∈Rn and r>0r > 0r>0, Br(x)={y:∣y−x∣<r}B_r(x) = \{y : |y - x| < r\}Br​(x)={y:∣y−x∣<r} is the open ball and ∂Br(x)={y:∣y−x∣=r}\partial B_r(x) = \{y : |y - x| = r\}∂Br​(x)={y:∣y−x∣=r} the sphere. For an open set Ω⊆Rn\Omega \subseteq \mathbb{R}^nΩ⊆Rn write Br(x)⋐ΩB_r(x) \Subset \OmegaBr​(x)⋐Ω when the closed ball B‾r(x)\overline{B}_r(x)Br​(x) is contained in Ω\OmegaΩ.

The Laplacian of a twice differentiable u:Ω→Ru : \Omega \to \mathbb{R}u:Ω→R is Δu=∑i=1n∂i2u\Delta u = \sum_{i=1}^n \partial_i^2 uΔu=∑i=1n​∂i2​u. A function u∈C2(Ω)u \in C^2(\Omega)u∈C2(Ω) is harmonic in Ω\OmegaΩ if Δu=0\Delta u = 0Δu=0 there, subharmonic if Δu≥0\Delta u \ge 0Δu≥0 and superharmonic if Δu≤0\Delta u \le 0Δu≤0 (Definition 2.4).

The averages of uuu over a ball and a sphere are

⨍Br(x)u dx=1αnrn∫Br(x)u dx,⨍∂Br(x)u dS=1nαnrn−1∫∂Br(x)u dS,⨍_{B_r(x)} u\,dx = \frac{1}{\alpha_n r^n}\int_{B_r(x)} u\,dx, \qquad ⨍_{\partial B_r(x)} u\,dS = \frac{1}{n\alpha_n r^{n-1}}\int_{\partial B_r(x)} u\,dS,⨍Br​(x)​udx=αn​rn1​∫Br​(x)​udx,⨍∂Br​(x)​udS=nαn​rn−11​∫∂Br​(x)​udS,

where αn\alpha_nαn​ is the volume of the unit ball and dSdSdS is surface measure. A continuous uuu has the mean-value property (2.3) in Ω\OmegaΩ if u(x)u(x)u(x) equals both averages whenever Br(x)⋐ΩB_r(x) \Subset \OmegaBr​(x)⋐Ω.

For a multi-index α=(α1,…,αn)∈N0n\alpha = (\alpha_1, \dots, \alpha_n) \in \mathbb{N}_0^nα=(α1​,…,αn​)∈N0n​ of order ∣α∣=α1+⋯+αn|\alpha| = \alpha_1 + \cdots + \alpha_n∣α∣=α1​+⋯+αn​, ∂αu\partial^\alpha u∂αu differentiates uuu αi\alpha_iαi​ times in the iii-th coordinate. A function is real-analytic in Ω\OmegaΩ if near every point of Ω\OmegaΩ it equals the sum of a convergent power series.

Formalization targets

Goal: analyticity (Theorem 2.10)

If u∈C2(Ω)u \in C^2(\Omega)u∈C2(Ω) is harmonic in an open set Ω⊆Rn\Omega \subseteq \mathbb{R}^nΩ⊆Rn, then uuu is real-analytic in Ω\OmegaΩ.

Milestones

  • Theorem 2.1 (mean value property): if uuu is harmonic and Br(x)⋐ΩB_r(x) \Subset \OmegaBr​(x)⋐Ω, then u(x)=⨍Br(x)u dx=⨍∂Br(x)u dSu(x) = ⨍_{B_r(x)} u\,dx = ⨍_{\partial B_r(x)} u\,dSu(x)=⨍Br​(x)​udx=⨍∂Br​(x)​udS.
  • Theorem 2.2 (converse): a continuous function with the mean-value property is C∞C^\inftyC∞ and harmonic.
  • Theorem 2.7: ∣∂iu(x)∣≤nrmax⁡B‾r(x)∣u∣|\partial_i u(x)| \le \dfrac{n}{r}\max_{\overline{B}_r(x)}|u|∣∂i​u(x)∣≤rn​maxBr​(x)​∣u∣ for harmonic uuu and Br(x)⋐ΩB_r(x) \Subset \OmegaBr​(x)⋐Ω.
  • Theorem 2.9: for ∣α∣=k≥1|\alpha| = k \ge 1∣α∣=k≥1,
∣∂αu(x)∣≤nkek−1k!rkmax⁡B‾r(x)∣u∣.|\partial^\alpha u(x)| \le \frac{n^k e^{k-1} k!}{r^k}\max_{\overline{B}_r(x)}|u|.∣∂αu(x)∣≤rknkek−1k!​Br​(x)max​∣u∣.
  • Corollary 2.8 (Liouville): a bounded harmonic function on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is constant.
  • Theorem 2.5: u(x)≤u(x) \leu(x)≤ both averages for subharmonic uuu, ≥\ge≥ for superharmonic uuu.
  • Theorem 2.13 (strong maximum principle): a subharmonic function on a connected open set that attains a global maximum is constant.
  • Theorem 2.17 (weak maximum principle): on a bounded connected open set, a harmonic u∈C2(Ω)∩C(Ω‾)u \in C^2(\Omega) \cap C(\overline{\Omega})u∈C2(Ω)∩C(Ω) satisfies max⁡Ω‾u=max⁡∂Ωu\max_{\overline{\Omega}} u = \max_{\partial\Omega} umaxΩ​u=max∂Ω​u and min⁡Ω‾u=min⁡∂Ωu\min_{\overline{\Omega}} u = \min_{\partial\Omega} uminΩ​u=min∂Ω​u.

Theorems 2.1, 2.2, 2.7 and 2.9 lie on the path to the goal; the others are further results on the same definitions.

Significance

The result. Analyticity means that a harmonic function is determined on a connected domain by its germ at one point (Corollary 2.11). It is the model case of analytic hypoellipticity for elliptic operators with analytic coefficients. The derivative estimates of Theorem 2.9, with a constant growing like k!k!k!, are the quantitative content: they are Cauchy-type estimates in several real variables and underlie compactness of families of harmonic functions and interior regularity arguments. The maximum principles give uniqueness for the Dirichlet problem (Theorem 2.18), and Liouville's theorem in Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is the classification of bounded entire harmonic functions.

Formalizing it. Mathlib defines the Laplacian and harmonicity on inner product spaces and proves that harmonic functions on C\mathbb{C}C are real parts of holomorphic functions, hence analytic; the Prove2Me corpus contains the mean value property and Liouville's theorem for functions on C\mathbb{C}C (two dimensions, circle averages). Nothing in Mathlib or on the platform covers harmonic functions on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn for general nnn: no mean value property over balls and spheres in Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, no derivative estimates, no maximum principle, no analyticity. All statements here are proved results; the work is formalizing the known proofs.

Difficulty

The two-dimensional route through holomorphic functions does not exist for n≥3n \ge 3n≥3: there is no complex structure to borrow, so analyticity must come from the real-variable estimates of Theorem 2.9 and a remainder estimate for the multivariable Taylor expansion. Those estimates need the mean value property on balls and spheres of Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, which requires surface measure on spheres, polar coordinates and the divergence theorem on a ball — tools that Mathlib has only in part. Theorem 2.9 asks for the constant nkek−1k!/rkn^k e^{k-1}k!/r^knkek−1k!/rk exactly, not merely some constant: the kkk-dependence is the whole point, since a bound that grows faster than k!k!k! times a geometric factor does not make the Taylor series converge. The converse Theorem 2.2 needs mollification. The weak maximum principle needs that the boundary of a bounded nonempty open set in Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is nonempty and that the closure is compact.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with Lebesgue measure volume; an open set is Ω : Set (EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n)) with IsOpen Ω. Functions are u : EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) → ℝ of which only the values on Ω\OmegaΩ (or Ω‾\overline{\Omega}Ω) matter.
  • "u∈C2(Ω)u \in C^2(\Omega)u∈C2(Ω) harmonic in Ω\OmegaΩ" is Mathlib's InnerProductSpace.HarmonicOnNhd u Ω; Δ\DeltaΔ is Mathlib's laplacian; C∞C^\inftyC∞ is ContDiffOn ℝ ∞ (smooth, not analytic); real-analytic in Ω\OmegaΩ is AnalyticOnNhd ℝ u Ω.
  • Br(x)⋐ΩB_r(x) \Subset \OmegaBr​(x)⋐Ω is 0 < r ∧ Metric.closedBall x r ⊆ Ω, never the open ball. The ball average is Mathlib's set average over Metric.ball x r; the sphere average is defined in polar form over the unit sphere with Mathlib's surface measure volume.toSphere. The mean-value property requires both identities of (2.3).
  • Coordinates are 0-based (i : Fin n); ∂iu(x)\partial_i u(x)∂i​u(x) is the Fréchet derivative applied to the iii-th basis vector, and ∂α\partial^\alpha∂α applies these repeatedly, αi\alpha_iαi​ times in coordinate iii.
  • max⁡B‾r(x)∣u∣\max_{\overline{B}_r(x)}|u|maxBr​(x)​∣u∣ in Theorems 2.7 and 2.9 is expressed by an arbitrary bound MMM of ∣u∣|u|∣u∣ on the closed ball; since the maximum is attained, this is equivalent. In Theorem 2.17 each equality of maxima is stated as attainment of the maximum over Ω‾\overline{\Omega}Ω at a point of ∂Ω\partial\Omega∂Ω.
  • Theorem 2.9 is stated for k=∣α∣≥1k = |\alpha| \ge 1k=∣α∣≥1: at k=0k = 0k=0 the printed bound reads ∣u(x)∣≤e−1max⁡∣u∣|u(x)| \le e^{-1}\max|u|∣u(x)∣≤e−1max∣u∣, which fails for constants. The hypothesis n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 is added where the statement mentions a sphere (Theorems 2.1, 2.5) or a boundary (Theorem 2.17), which are empty in R0\mathbb{R}^0R0.
  • A trivializing reading is excluded: the balls are closed balls of positive radius inside Ω\OmegaΩ, the averages are normalized integrals of continuous functions over sets of positive finite measure, and analyticity is required at every point of Ω\OmegaΩ rather than on one ball.

Needed infrastructure, reusable well beyond this mission: surface measure and polar coordinates on spheres of Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, the divergence theorem on balls, mollification of continuous functions, and multivariable Taylor expansion with remainder in multi-index form. Contributions of any of these as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • J. K. Hunter, Notes on Partial Differential Equations, UC Davis lecture notes, revised 6/18/2014, Chapter 2. https://www.math.ucdavis.edu/~hunter/pdes/pde_notes.pdf
  • L. C. Evans, Partial Differential Equations, 2nd ed., AMS Graduate Studies in Mathematics 19, 2010, §2.2. https://doi.org/10.1090/gsm/019
  • D. Gilbarg and N. S. Trudinger, Elliptic Partial Differential Equations of Second Order, Springer Classics in Mathematics, 2001, Chapter 2. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-642-61798-0
  • Q. Han and F. Lin, Elliptic Partial Differential Equations, 2nd ed., Courant Lecture Notes 1, AMS, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1090/cln/001
40 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Generalized Gradients and Applications I: The Generalized Gradient of a Max FunctionResearch Paper

Motivation

Many objective functions in optimization are pointwise maxima: the worst case of a loss over an uncertainty set, the value of a minimax problem as a function of the outer variable, a penalty max⁡igi(x)\max_i g_i(x)maxi​gi​(x) for a system of constraints, or the largest eigenvalue of a symmetric matrix. Such a function

f(x)=max⁡{g(x,u):u∈U}f(x)=\max\{g(x,u):u\in U\}f(x)=max{g(x,u):u∈U}

is typically not differentiable even when every piece g(⋅,u)g(\cdot,u)g(⋅,u) is smooth, because the maximizing uuu jumps. Descent methods, optimality conditions and sensitivity analysis for these problems all need a substitute for the gradient of fff and a formula for its directional derivatives.

Danskin's theorem (Danskin 1966) answers this when ∇xg(x,u)\nabla_x g(x,u)∇x​g(x,u) exists and is continuous in (x,u)(x,u)(x,u) and UUU is compact: fff has one-sided directional derivatives f′(x;v)=max⁡{∇xg(x,u)⋅v:u∈M(x)}f'(x;v)=\max\{\nabla_x g(x,u)\cdot v:u\in M(x)\}f′(x;v)=max{∇x​g(x,u)⋅v:u∈M(x)}, where M(x)M(x)M(x) is the set of maximizers. Convex analysis gives the analogue when each g(⋅,u)g(\cdot,u)g(⋅,u) is convex (Rockafellar 1970). In Generalized gradients and applications (Clarke 1975) Frank Clarke introduced the generalized gradient of a locally Lipschitz function and proved, as his first application, a single theorem, Theorem (2.1), that contains both cases. The generalized gradient became the standard object of nonsmooth analysis (Clarke 1983), and Theorem (2.1) is the prototype of every "subdifferential of a max function" rule used in minimax optimization.

Setting

Work in Rn\mathbb R^nRn with the Euclidean norm ∣⋅∣|\cdot|∣⋅∣ and inner product ζ⋅v\zeta\cdot vζ⋅v. A function f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rf:Rn→R is locally Lipschitz if for every bounded set BBB there is KKK with ∣f(x1)−f(x2)∣≤K∣x1−x2∣|f(x_1)-f(x_2)|\le K|x_1-x_2|∣f(x1​)−f(x2​)∣≤K∣x1​−x2​∣ for x1,x2∈Bx_1,x_2\in Bx1​,x2​∈B. By Rademacher's theorem such fff is differentiable almost everywhere.

  • The generalized gradient ∂f(x)\partial f(x)∂f(x) (Definition (1.1)) is the convex hull of all limits lim⁡i∇f(x+hi)\lim_i\nabla f(x+h_i)limi​∇f(x+hi​), where hi→0h_i\to0hi​→0, fff is differentiable at each x+hix+h_ix+hi​, and the gradients converge.
  • The generalized directional derivative (Definition (1.3)) is
f∘(x;v)=lim sup⁡h→0, δ↓0f(x+h+δv)−f(x+h)δ,f^\circ(x;v)=\limsup_{h\to0,\ \delta\downarrow0}\frac{f(x+h+\delta v)-f(x+h)}{\delta},f∘(x;v)=h→0, δ↓0limsup​δf(x+h+δv)−f(x+h)​,

and the one-sided directional derivative is f′(x;v)=lim⁡δ↓0[f(x+δv)−f(x)]/δf'(x;v)=\lim_{\delta\downarrow0}[f(x+\delta v)-f(x)]/\deltaf′(x;v)=limδ↓0​[f(x+δv)−f(x)]/δ when the limit exists.

  • A multifunction Φ\PhiΦ into subsets of Rn\mathbb R^nRn is upper semicontinuous if xi→xx_i\to xxi​→x, vi→vv_i\to vvi​→v and vi∈Φ(xi)v_i\in\Phi(x_i)vi​∈Φ(xi​) imply v∈Φ(x)v\in\Phi(x)v∈Φ(x).

For the max function, UUU is a nonempty sequentially compact topological space and g:Rn×U→Rg:\mathbb R^n\times U\to\mathbb Rg:Rn×U→R. Write ∂xg(x,u)\partial_xg(x,u)∂x​g(x,u), gx∘(x,u;v)g^\circ_x(x,u;v)gx∘​(x,u;v), gx′(x,u;v)g'_x(x,u;v)gx′​(x,u;v) for the objects above applied to y↦g(y,u)y\mapsto g(y,u)y↦g(y,u) at xxx. Let f(x)=max⁡u∈Ug(x,u)f(x)=\max_{u\in U}g(x,u)f(x)=maxu∈U​g(x,u) and M(x)={u∈U:g(x,u)=f(x)}M(x)=\{u\in U:g(x,u)=f(x)\}M(x)={u∈U:g(x,u)=f(x)}. The hypotheses of Theorem (2.1) are:

  • (a) ggg is upper semicontinuous in (x,u)(x,u)(x,u);
  • (b) ggg is locally Lipschitz in xxx uniformly in uuu: for each bounded BBB one constant KKK serves for every u∈Uu\in Uu∈U;
  • (c) for all x,u,vx,u,vx,u,v, gx′(x,u;v)g'_x(x,u;v)gx′​(x,u;v) exists and equals gx∘(x,u;v)g^\circ_x(x,u;v)gx∘​(x,u;v);
  • (d) (x,u)↦∂xg(x,u)(x,u)\mapsto\partial_xg(x,u)(x,u)↦∂x​g(x,u) is upper semicontinuous on Rn×U\mathbb R^n\times URn×U.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem (2.1)

Under (a)–(d):

  1. fff is locally Lipschitz;
  2. f′(x;v)f'(x;v)f′(x;v) exists for all x,vx,vx,v;
  3. f′(x;v)=f∘(x;v)=max⁡{ζ⋅v:ζ∈∂xg(x,u), u∈M(x)}f'(x;v)=f^\circ(x;v)=\max\{\zeta\cdot v:\zeta\in\partial_xg(x,u),\ u\in M(x)\}f′(x;v)=f∘(x;v)=max{ζ⋅v:ζ∈∂x​g(x,u), u∈M(x)};
  4. for every xxx,
∂f(x)=co⁡{∂xg(x,u):u∈M(x)}.\partial f(x)=\operatorname{co}\{\partial_xg(x,u):u\in M(x)\}.∂f(x)=co{∂x​g(x,u):u∈M(x)}.

Milestones

  • Proposition (1.4): f∘(x;v)=max⁡{ζ⋅v:ζ∈∂f(x)}f^\circ(x;v)=\max\{\zeta\cdot v:\zeta\in\partial f(x)\}f∘(x;v)=max{ζ⋅v:ζ∈∂f(x)} for locally Lipschitz fff.
  • Corollary (1.10): if ζ⋅v≤lim sup⁡δ↓0[f(x+δv)−f(x)]/δ\zeta\cdot v\le\limsup_{\delta\downarrow0}[f(x+\delta v)-f(x)]/\deltaζ⋅v≤limsupδ↓0​[f(x+δv)−f(x)]/δ for all vvv, then ζ∈∂f(x)\zeta\in\partial f(x)ζ∈∂f(x).
  • Theorem (2.1)(1): under (a), (b), fff is locally Lipschitz.
  • (2.2): co⁡{∂xg(x,u):u∈M(x)}⊆∂f(x)\operatorname{co}\{\partial_xg(x,u):u\in M(x)\}\subseteq\partial f(x)co{∂x​g(x,u):u∈M(x)}⊆∂f(x).
  • (2.3): if fff is differentiable at xˉ\bar xxˉ and u∈M(xˉ)u\in M(\bar x)u∈M(xˉ), then ∂xg(xˉ,u)={∇f(xˉ)}\partial_xg(\bar x,u)=\{\nabla f(\bar x)\}∂x​g(xˉ,u)={∇f(xˉ)}.
  • Theorem (2.1)(4): the equality above.

Significance

The result. Theorem (2.1) computes the directional derivatives and the generalized gradient of a max function from those of its active pieces. It yields Danskin's theorem when ∇xg\nabla_xg∇x​g is continuous, and the convex max rule when each g(⋅,u)g(\cdot,u)g(⋅,u) is convex, and it applies to nonsmooth, nonconvex families satisfying (c), a property later called regularity (Clarke 1983, §2.3). In the same paper it is applied to the distance function dE(x)=min⁡e∈E∣x−e∣d_E(x)=\min_{e\in E}|x-e|dE​(x)=mine∈E​∣x−e∣ to compute ∂dE\partial d_E∂dE​ (Proposition (2.4), Corollary (2.5)), which then drives the characterization of flow-invariant sets in §4. Proposition (1.4) and Corollary (1.10), which the theorem rests on, are the duality between ∂f\partial f∂f and f∘f^\circf∘ used throughout nonsmooth optimization: Clarke stationarity, bundle methods and subgradient methods for weakly convex functions all state their results against them.

Formalizing it. The results are classical and proved; none of them, to the platform's knowledge, has a machine-checked proof. Mathlib has Rademacher's theorem, gradients and convex hulls, but no Clarke generalized gradient. This mission builds the first layer of nonsmooth analysis: the definitions of ∂f\partial f∂f, f∘f^\circf∘, f′f'f′ and upper semicontinuity of multifunctions, the support-function duality, and the max rule.

Difficulty

The obvious approach reads ∂f(x)\partial f(x)∂f(x) off a single active piece. It fails because the active set M(x+h)M(x+h)M(x+h) changes as h→0h\to0h→0, may be infinite, and need not converge; fff can be differentiable at points where no individual piece is known to be. Hypothesis (c) cannot be dropped: for UUU a single point and g(x,u)=−∣x∣g(x,u)=-|x|g(x,u)=−∣x∣ on R\mathbb RR, f=gf=gf=g has f′(0;v)=−∣v∣f'(0;v)=-|v|f′(0;v)=−∣v∣ while f∘(0;v)=∣v∣f^\circ(0;v)=|v|f∘(0;v)=∣v∣, so conclusion (3) fails. Limits of maximizers exist only through the sequential compactness of UUU together with (a), and limits of gradients only through the joint closed-graph condition (d) in (x,u)(x,u)(x,u); continuity in xxx for each fixed uuu is not enough. Proposition (1.4), on which everything rests, is itself a measure-theoretic statement: it relates the upper limit of difference quotients over all nearby base points to gradients that exist only almost everywhere.

Formalization scope

  • Rn\mathbb R^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), ζ⋅v\zeta\cdot vζ⋅v is inner ℝ ζ v, ∇f\nabla f∇f is Mathlib's gradient, and "∇f(x)\nabla f(x)∇f(x) exists" is DifferentiableAt ℝ f x.
  • "Locally Lipschitz" is the paper's bounded-set form, LipschitzOnBounded. Hypothesis (b) is ∀ B bounded, ∃ K, ∀ u, LipschitzOnWith K (g · u) B: the constant is uniform in uuu.
  • ∂f(x)\partial f(x)∂f(x) is the plain convex hull (no closure) of limits of gradients taken only at differentiability points; without that restriction 000 would belong to every ∂f(x)\partial f(x)∂f(x), because gradient is 000 where fff is not differentiable.
  • f∘f^\circf∘ is Filter.limsup in R\mathbb RR along N(0)×N>(0)\mathcal N(0)\times\mathcal N_{>}(0)N(0)×N>​(0); this is a junk value for non-Lipschitz fff, so every statement using f∘f^\circf∘ assumes the Lipschitz hypothesis. The one-sided derivative is a Tendsto along N>(0)\mathcal N_{>}(0)N>​(0).
  • "max" in conclusions is IsGreatest, which asserts attainment. The max function is ⨆ u, g x u; UUU is nonempty ([Nonempty U]) and SeqCompactSpace, and (a) is Mathlib's UpperSemicontinuous on Rn×U\mathbb R^n\times URn×U. The paper uses U≠∅U\ne\emptysetU=∅ implicitly; with U=∅U=\emptysetU=∅ conclusion (4) would be false.
  • (d) is the sequential closed-graph property in (x,u)(x,u)(x,u) jointly, not Mathlib's UpperHemicontinuous.
  • A formalization in which ∂f\partial f∂f contains junk gradients, f∘f^\circf∘ is a limsup without the Lipschitz hypothesis, or "max" is sSup without attainment would make the statements trivial or false; these are ruled out as above.

Contributions welcome: proofs of the milestones, in particular Proposition (1.4) and Corollary (1.10), which are reusable for every later nonsmooth-analysis mission; lemmas that ∂f(x)\partial f(x)∂f(x) is nonempty and compact; the equivalence of LipschitzOnBounded with Mathlib's LocallyLipschitz.

Selected references

  • F. H. Clarke, Generalized gradients and applications, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 205 (1975), 247–262. https://doi.org/10.1090/s0002-9947-1975-0367131-6
  • J. M. Danskin, The theory of max-min, with applications, SIAM J. Appl. Math. 14 (1966), 641–664. https://doi.org/10.1137/0114053
  • R. T. Rockafellar, Convex Analysis, Princeton University Press, 1970. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400873173
  • F. H. Clarke, Optimization and Nonsmooth Analysis, Wiley, 1983; SIAM Classics reprint 1990. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971309
13 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Numerical AnalysisOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Analysis of Generalized Pattern Searches: Nonnegative Clarke Derivatives at Limits of Refining SubsequencesResearch Paper

Motivation

Generalized pattern search (GPS) is a class of derivative-free methods for minimizing a function that can only be evaluated, not differentiated. Such objectives arise in engineering design, where one evaluation is an expensive simulation that may fail and return no value at all. The helicopter rotor design problem of Booker et al. is one example: no value was returned for roughly 66% of the trial points (Booker et al., 1999). A method for such problems has to tolerate objectives that are discontinuous or take the value +∞+\infty+∞.

Earlier convergence theory for GPS assumed continuous differentiability of the objective on a neighbourhood of the level set. Torczon established it for unconstrained problems (SIAM J. Optim. 7, 1997), and Lewis and Torczon extended it to bound constraints (1999) and to finitely many linear constraints (SIAM J. Optim. 10, 2000). Audet and Dennis (SIAM J. Optim. 13, 2003) replaced these analyses with a single argument. Its conclusions are local and are graded by the smoothness of the objective at the limit point only, through Clarke's generalized directional derivative. That paper is the source of this mission. Its analysis is the basis of the later mesh adaptive direct search (MADS) theory (Audet, Dennis, SIAM J. Optim. 17, 2006).

Setting

The problem is

min⁡x∈Ωf(x),f:Rn→R∪{+∞},Ω={x∈Rn:ℓ≤Ax≤u},\min_{x\in\Omega} f(x),\qquad f:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\},\qquad \Omega=\{x\in\mathbb R^n:\ell\le Ax\le u\},x∈Ωmin​f(x),f:Rn→R∪{+∞},Ω={x∈Rn:ℓ≤Ax≤u},

with A∈Rm×nA\in\mathbb R^{m\times n}A∈Rm×n and ℓ≤u\ell\le uℓ≤u in (R∪{±∞})m(\mathbb R\cup\{\pm\infty\})^m(R∪{±∞})m. The algorithm works with the barrier function fΩf_\OmegafΩ​, equal to fff on Ω\OmegaΩ and to +∞+\infty+∞ elsewhere.

The algorithm uses a finite set of directions D=GZˉD=G\bar ZD=GZˉ, the columns dj=Gzˉjd_j=G\bar z_jdj​=Gzˉj​ of the product of a nonsingular G∈Rn×nG\in\mathbb R^{n\times n}G∈Rn×n and an integer matrix Zˉ∈Zn×p\bar Z\in\mathbb Z^{n\times p}Zˉ∈Zn×p. The directions form a positive spanning set: their nonnegative combinations give all of Rn\mathbb R^nRn. At iteration kkk, with iterate xkx_kxk​ and mesh size parameter Δk>0\Delta_k>0Δk​>0, the mesh is Mk={xk+ΔkDz:z∈Z+p}M_k=\{x_k+\Delta_k Dz: z\in\mathbb Z_+^{p}\}Mk​={xk​+Δk​Dz:z∈Z+p​}. A poll set {xk+Δkd:d∈Dk}\{x_k+\Delta_k d: d\in D_k\}{xk​+Δk​d:d∈Dk​} is drawn from a positive spanning subset Dk⊆DD_k\subseteq DDk​⊆D. Each iteration ends in one of two ways:

  1. Improved mesh point. Some xk+1∈Mk∩Ωx_{k+1}\in M_k\cap\Omegaxk+1​∈Mk​∩Ω with fΩ(xk+1)<fΩ(xk)f_\Omega(x_{k+1})<f_\Omega(x_k)fΩ​(xk+1​)<fΩ​(xk​) was found, by the free SEARCH step or by the poll. Then Δk+1=τwkΔk\Delta_{k+1}=\tau^{w_k}\Delta_kΔk+1​=τwk​Δk​ with 0≤wk≤w+0\le w_k\le w^+0≤wk​≤w+.
  2. Mesh local optimizer. fΩ(xk)≤fΩ(xk+Δkd)f_\Omega(x_k)\le f_\Omega(x_k+\Delta_k d)fΩ​(xk​)≤fΩ​(xk​+Δk​d) for every d∈Dkd\in D_kd∈Dk​. Then xk+1=xkx_{k+1}=x_kxk+1​=xk​ and Δk+1=τwkΔk\Delta_{k+1}=\tau^{w_k}\Delta_kΔk+1​=τwk​Δk​ with w−≤wk≤−1w^-\le w_k\le-1w−≤wk​≤−1.

Here τ>1\tau>1τ>1 is rational and w−≤−1≤0≤w+w^-\le-1\le 0\le w^+w−≤−1≤0≤w+ are integers. The assumptions are A1 fΩ(x0)<∞f_\Omega(x_0)<\inftyfΩ​(x0​)<∞, A2 AAA is rational, and A3 all iterates lie in a compact set. A refining subsequence is an infinite set of mesh local optimizers {xk}k∈K\{x_k\}_{k\in K}{xk​}k∈K​ along which Δk→0\Delta_k\to 0Δk​→0 (Definition 3.5). For fff Lipschitz near x^\hat xx^, Clarke's derivative is

f∘(x^;d)=lim sup⁡y→x^, t↓0f(y+td)−f(y)t.f^\circ(\hat x;d)=\limsup_{y\to\hat x,\ t\downarrow 0}\frac{f(y+td)-f(y)}{t}.f∘(x^;d)=y→x^, t↓0limsup​tf(y+td)−f(y)​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.7

Assume A1–A3. Let x^\hat xx^ be the limit of a refining subsequence, and let d∈Dd\in Dd∈D be a direction polled at a feasible point xk+Δkdx_k+\Delta_k dxk​+Δk​d for infinitely many kkk in the subsequence. If fff is Lipschitz near x^\hat xx^, then

f∘(x^;d) ≥ 0.f^\circ(\hat x;d)\ \ge\ 0 .f∘(x^;d) ≥ 0.

Milestones on the way

  • Theorem 3.1: the iterates have a limit point, lim⁡kf(xk)\lim_k f(x_k)limk​f(xk​) exists and dominates fff at lower semicontinuity limit points, and all continuity limit points share one value.
  • Lemma 3.2: min⁡u≠v∈Mk∥u−v∥≥Δk/∥G−1∥\min_{u\ne v\in M_k}\|u-v\|\ge\Delta_k/\|G^{-1}\|minu=v∈Mk​​∥u−v∥≥Δk​/∥G−1∥ for every norm giving nonzero integer vectors norm at least 111.
  • Lemma 3.3: Δk≤Δ0τr+\Delta_k\le\Delta_0\tau^{r^+}Δk​≤Δ0​τr+ for some positive integer r+r^+r+.
  • Proposition 3.4: lim inf⁡k→∞Δk=0\liminf_{k\to\infty}\Delta_k=0liminfk→∞​Δk​=0.
  • Theorem 3.6: a convergent refining subsequence exists.

Corollaries

  • Theorem 3.9: if Ω=Rn\Omega=\mathbb R^nΩ=Rn and fff is strictly differentiable at x^\hat xx^, then ∇f(x^)=0\nabla f(\hat x)=0∇f(x^)=0.
  • Theorem 3.14: if the poll sets conform to the boundary of Ω\OmegaΩ (Definition 3.13) and fff is strictly differentiable at x^\hat xx^, then ∇f(x^)Tw≥0\nabla f(\hat x)^Tw\ge 0∇f(x^)Tw≥0 on the tangent cone TΩ(x^)T_\Omega(\hat x)TΩ​(x^) and −∇f(x^)∈NΩ(x^)-\nabla f(\hat x)\in N_\Omega(\hat x)−∇f(x^)∈NΩ​(x^). So x^\hat xx^ is a KKT point.

Significance

Theorem 3.7 gives a first-order conclusion at a limit point from a local hypothesis at that point alone. It does not require smoothness elsewhere, finiteness of fff elsewhere, or continuity. It turns the heuristic "the method stopped improving on ever finer meshes" into a statement about generalized derivatives. The unconstrained stationarity result (Theorem 3.9) and the linearly constrained KKT result (Theorem 3.14) follow from it, and they recover the Torczon and Lewis–Torczon theorems under weaker smoothness assumptions. The chain Lemma 3.2 → Lemma 3.3 → Proposition 3.4 → Theorem 3.6 shows that the goal's hypothesis is always met. Every run satisfying A1 and A3 has a refining subsequence, which rests on the rationality of τ\tauτ and on the integer structure of DDD.

All results in this mission are proved in the source paper. None of them has, to the best of our knowledge, a machine-checked proof. The mission contributes a formal model of the GPS algorithm class as a class of runs, a formal Clarke directional derivative, and checked proofs of the mesh-refinement chain and the main theorem.

Difficulty

Given a refining subsequence, the goal is a comparison of limsups: the poll inequalities give nonnegative difference quotients at the points (xk,Δk)(x_k,\Delta_k)(xk​,Δk​), which converge to (x^,0+)(\hat x,0^+)(x^,0+). The difficulty lies in two places. First, the objective is extended-valued, and the barrier hides fff at infeasible poll points, where the poll inequality fΩ(xk)≤+∞f_\Omega(x_k)\le+\inftyfΩ​(xk​)≤+∞ says nothing. The hypothesis on ddd has to supply feasibility, and the Lipschitz hypothesis has to supply finiteness near x^\hat xx^. Second, the existence of refining subsequences is not a compactness argument alone. Coarsening is allowed, so Δk\Delta_kΔk​ need not decrease, and with an irrational τ\tauτ or a direction set that is not an integer lattice image (for instance D=[−1,+π]D=[-1,+\pi]D=[−1,+π] in R\mathbb RR) the meshes can be dense and lim inf⁡Δk\liminf\Delta_kliminfΔk​ can be positive. The lattice argument behind Proposition 3.4 is where the integrality hypotheses are used.

Formalization scope

Points of Rn\mathbb R^nRn are Fin n → ℝ, fff takes values in WithTop ℝ, and the bounds ℓ,u\ell,uℓ,u are EReal-valued, so m=0m=0m=0 gives Ω=Rn\Omega=\mathbb R^nΩ=Rn. The barrier is defined by cases, never by extended addition. Directions are the columns of G * Zbar indexed by Fin p, and DkD_kDk​ is a Finset (Fin p). A GPS run is a structure of sequences xk,Δk,Dk,wkx_k,\Delta_k,D_k,w_kxk​,Δk​,Dk​,wk​ and a per-iteration predicate "mesh local optimizer", subject to exactly the two update rules above, Δ0>0\Delta_0>0Δ0​>0, rational τ>1\tau>1τ>1 and the exponent bounds. The SEARCH step, the choice of DkD_kDk​ and the exponents are left free, since the paper allows any strategy. A subsequence is a strictly increasing map K:N→NK:\mathbb N\to\mathbb NK:N→N. The Clarke derivative of a real function is an EReal-valued limit superior along y→x^y\to\hat xy→x^, t→0+t\to 0^+t→0+. "fff Lipschitz near x^\hat xx^" means that fff agrees near x^\hat xx^ with a real function Lipschitz there, and the conclusions are stated for every such function. Strict differentiability is the directional notion of Section 3.4 of the paper.

The goal is not trivialized by an empty run class: Theorem 3.6, on the same class, asserts that refining subsequences exist. The mesh-local-optimizer branch requires the complete poll inequality over DkD_kDk​. The Clarke limit superior cannot take a default value. The direction ddd must be polled at feasible points infinitely often, which is the paper's "fff was evaluated".

Contributions welcome: proofs of any milestone, and reusable lemmas on positive spanning sets, lattice points in compact sets, and the Clarke derivative (for instance, that it equals ∇f(x^)Td\nabla f(\hat x)^Td∇f(x^)Td under strict differentiability).

Selected references

  • C. Audet, J. E. Dennis Jr., Analysis of Generalized Pattern Searches, SIAM J. Optim. 13(3):889–903, 2003. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623400378742
  • V. Torczon, On the Convergence of Pattern Search Algorithms, SIAM J. Optim. 7(1):1–25, 1997. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623493250780
  • R. M. Lewis, V. Torczon, Pattern Search Methods for Linearly Constrained Minimization, SIAM J. Optim. 10(3):917–941, 2000. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623497331373
  • F. H. Clarke, Optimization and Nonsmooth Analysis, Wiley, 1983; reprinted SIAM Classics in Applied Mathematics 5, 1990. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971309
  • A. J. Booker, J. E. Dennis Jr., P. D. Frank, D. B. Serafini, V. Torczon, M. W. Trosset, A rigorous framework for optimization of expensive functions by surrogates, Structural Optimization 17:1–13, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01197559
  • C. Audet, J. E. Dennis Jr., Mesh Adaptive Direct Search Algorithms for Constrained Optimization, SIAM J. Optim. 17(1):188–217, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1137/040603371
13 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Numerical AnalysisOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

A Nonsmooth Version of Newton's Method I: local superlinear convergence of the generalized-Jacobian Newton method at a semismooth regular rootResearch Paper

Motivation

Many problems in optimization and equilibrium modelling reduce to a system of equations F(x)=0F(x) = 0F(x)=0 whose map F:Rn→RnF : \mathbb R^n \to \mathbb R^nF:Rn→Rn is Lipschitz but not differentiable: reformulations of nonlinear complementarity problems through the componentwise minimum or the Fischer–Burmeister function, Karush–Kuhn–Tucker systems of constrained programs, and gradients of augmented Lagrangians all have kinks. Newton's method, xk+1=xk−F′(xk)−1F(xk)x^{k+1} = x^k - F'(x^k)^{-1}F(x^k)xk+1=xk−F′(xk)−1F(xk), is the standard fast local solver for smooth systems, but it needs a derivative at every iterate.

Qi and Sun (Math. Programming 58, 1993) replaced the Jacobian by an arbitrary element of Clarke's generalized Jacobian and showed that the resulting method converges locally superlinearly under a regularity condition they called semismoothness, extending Mifflin's notion for functionals (Mifflin, SIAM J. Control Optim. 15, 1977) to vector-valued maps. This theorem is the foundation of the family of semismooth Newton methods used in complementarity, variational inequalities and PDE-constrained optimization.

Timeline. Robinson (1988) and Pang (Math. OR 15, 1990) studied Newton methods built on B-derivatives, with convergence proved under a strong Fréchet derivative at the solution; Kummer (1988) gave an abstract framework for Newton methods for nonsmooth equations; Qi and Sun (1993) proved local superlinear convergence for the generalized-Jacobian iteration under semismoothness and nonsingularity of ∂F(x∗)\partial F(x^*)∂F(x∗), with order 1+p1+p1+p under ppp-order semismoothness.

Setting

Let F:Rn→RmF : \mathbb R^n \to \mathbb R^mF:Rn→Rm be locally Lipschitz. By Rademacher's theorem FFF is differentiable on a set DFD_FDF​ of full measure; write JF(y)JF(y)JF(y) for the Jacobian at y∈DFy \in D_Fy∈DF​. The generalized Jacobian is

∂F(x)=co{lim⁡i→∞JF(xi):xi→x, xi∈DF},\partial F(x) = \mathrm{co}\Big\{\lim_{i\to\infty} JF(x_i) : x_i \to x,\ x_i \in D_F\Big\},∂F(x)=co{i→∞lim​JF(xi​):xi​→x, xi​∈DF​},

the convex hull of all limits of Jacobians along sequences of differentiability points converging to xxx. The one-sided directional derivative is F′(x;h)=lim⁡t↓0(F(x+th)−F(x))/tF'(x;h) = \lim_{t\downarrow 0}(F(x+th)-F(x))/tF′(x;h)=limt↓0​(F(x+th)−F(x))/t.

FFF is semismooth at xxx if it is Lipschitz near xxx and, for every hhh, the limit of Vh′Vh'Vh′ over V∈∂F(x+th′)V \in \partial F(x+th')V∈∂F(x+th′), h′→hh' \to hh′→h, t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0 exists. For 0<p≤10 < p \le 10<p≤1, FFF is ppp-order semismooth at xxx if in addition Vh−F′(x;h)=O(∥h∥1+p)Vh - F'(x;h) = O(\|h\|^{1+p})Vh−F′(x;h)=O(∥h∥1+p) for V∈∂F(x+h)V \in \partial F(x+h)V∈∂F(x+h), h→0h \to 0h→0.

For m=nm = nm=n, the nonsmooth Newton method is

xk+1=xk−Vk−1F(xk),Vk∈∂F(xk),(3.2)x^{k+1} = x^k - V_k^{-1}F(x^k), \qquad V_k \in \partial F(x^k), \tag{3.2}xk+1=xk−Vk−1​F(xk),Vk​∈∂F(xk),(3.2)

where any element of ∂F(xk)\partial F(x^k)∂F(xk) may be chosen at each step. A run is a pair of sequences (xk)(x^k)(xk), (Vk)(V_k)(Vk​) with Vk∈∂F(xk)V_k \in \partial F(x^k)Vk​∈∂F(xk) and Vk(xk+1−xk)=−F(xk)V_k(x^{k+1}-x^k) = -F(x^k)Vk​(xk+1−xk)=−F(xk) for all kkk. A root x∗x^*x∗ (F(x∗)=0F(x^*) = 0F(x∗)=0) is regular when every V∈∂F(x∗)V \in \partial F(x^*)V∈∂F(x∗) is nonsingular.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2, local superlinear convergence

Let FFF be locally Lipschitz, F(x∗)=0F(x^*) = 0F(x∗)=0, FFF semismooth at x∗x^*x∗, and every V∈∂F(x∗)V \in \partial F(x^*)V∈∂F(x∗) nonsingular. Then there is δ>0\delta > 0δ>0 such that every V∈∂F(y)V \in \partial F(y)V∈∂F(y) with ∥y−x∗∥<δ\|y - x^*\| < \delta∥y−x∗∥<δ is nonsingular, a Newton step from such a yyy stays within δ\deltaδ of x∗x^*x∗, and every run with ∥x0−x∗∥<δ\|x^0 - x^*\| < \delta∥x0−x∗∥<δ satisfies

xk→x∗,∥xk+1−x∗∥=o(∥xk−x∗∥).x^k \to x^*, \qquad \|x^{k+1} - x^*\| = o(\|x^k - x^*\|).xk→x∗,∥xk+1−x∗∥=o(∥xk−x∗∥).

The goal asserts only the shape of the convergence (superlinear) and fixes no constants.

Stronger: Theorem 3.2, order 1+p1 + p1+p

If moreover FFF is ppp-order semismooth at x∗x^*x∗, 0<p≤10 < p \le 10<p≤1, there are δ>0\delta > 0δ>0 and CCC with

∥xk+1−x∗∥≤C∥xk−x∗∥1+p\|x^{k+1} - x^*\| \le C\|x^k - x^*\|^{1+p}∥xk+1−x∗∥≤C∥xk−x∗∥1+p

for every run started within δ\deltaδ of x∗x^*x∗.

Milestones

The milestones follow the paper's route: Proposition 2.1 (the limit in the definition of semismoothness is the directional derivative), Lemma 2.2 (Lipschitz continuity of F′(x;⋅)F'(x;\cdot)F′(x;⋅) and its realisation by an element of ∂F(x)\partial F(x)∂F(x)), Theorem 2.3 (semismoothness is equivalent to Vh−F′(x;h)=o(∥h∥)Vh - F'(x;h) = o(\|h\|)Vh−F′(x;h)=o(∥h∥) and to the corresponding condition at differentiability points), the Remark's expansion (2.17), Proposition 3.1 (uniform invertibility near a regular point), the order-(1+p)(1+p)(1+p) sentence of Theorem 3.2, and Corollary 2.5 (strong Fréchet differentiability implies semismoothness).

Significance

The theorem gives a locally superlinearly convergent method for Lipschitz equations with no smoothness beyond semismoothness at the root. Convex, smooth and subsmooth functions are semismooth, as are sums and scalar products of semismooth functions (the paper, citing Mifflin), and later work showed that the complementarity and KKT reformulations on which semismooth Newton solvers are built are semismooth as well; the order-(1+p)(1+p)(1+p) variant gives local quadratic convergence for strongly semismooth maps. Mission II of this series treats the paper's global convergence theorem on a ball, and Mission III the semismoothness of augmented Lagrangian gradients, which supplies the application.

The results are proved in the paper. No machine-checked version of the generalized Jacobian, of semismoothness or of the nonsmooth Newton method is known to exist in Mathlib or on this platform; the platform's formalized Newton results concern one-dimensional C2C^2C2 functions (MetodosNumericos.newton_local_convergence) and smooth convex minimization. A complete development would provide the first formal library for Clarke's generalized Jacobian and semismooth maps.

Difficulty

The classical Newton proof compares F(xk)F(x^k)F(xk) with its linearization JF(x∗)(xk−x∗)JF(x^*)(x^k - x^*)JF(x∗)(xk−x∗) and uses continuity of the Jacobian at x∗x^*x∗. Here neither is available: FFF need not be differentiable at x∗x^*x∗ or at any iterate, the element VkV_kVk​ is chosen arbitrarily from a set, and VkV_kVk​ need not be close to any fixed linear map. The comparison has to go through the directional derivative F′(x∗;⋅)F'(x^*; \cdot)F′(x∗;⋅), which is only positively homogeneous, not linear. The analytic content therefore sits in Section 2: showing that semismoothness, defined through a limit over a set-valued map, controls Vh−F′(x;h)Vh - F'(x;h)Vh−F′(x;h) uniformly in the direction, and that F(x+h)−F(x)−F′(x;h)F(x+h) - F(x) - F'(x;h)F(x+h)−F(x)−F′(x;h) is small. Both rest on Clarke's mean-value inclusion and on compactness and upper semicontinuity of ∂F\partial F∂F, none of which is in Mathlib. The superlinear rate also requires a uniform bound on ∥V−1∥\|V^{-1}\|∥V−1∥ in a whole neighbourhood, not just at x∗x^*x∗.

Formalization scope

Everything lives in the namespace NonsmoothNewton.Local. Section 2 results are stated for maps between finite-dimensional real normed spaces E→GE \to GE→G (the paper's Rn→Rm\mathbb R^n \to \mathbb R^mRn→Rm is the Euclidean instance); Section 3 results use EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n). Conventions fixed by the Lean statements:

  • JFJFJF is fderiv; the generalized Jacobian is the convex hull (no closure) of limits of fderiv along sequences xi→xx_i \to xxi​→x of differentiability points.
  • F′(x;h)F'(x;h)F′(x;h) is the one-sided limit over t↓0t \downarrow 0t↓0, never the two-sided lineDeriv; its value is a limUnder, used only where existence is a hypothesis or a consequence.
  • Nonsingular means IsUnit in the ring of continuous linear endomorphisms; ∥V−1∥≤C\|V^{-1}\| \le C∥V−1∥≤C is a two-sided inverse of operator norm at most CCC.
  • A run of (3.2) is encoded by the linear equation Vk(xk+1−xk)=−F(xk)V_k(x^{k+1} - x^k) = -F(x^k)Vk​(xk+1−xk)=−F(xk) with Vk∈∂F(xk)V_k \in \partial F(x^k)Vk​∈∂F(xk); all choices of VkV_kVk​ are quantified, and δ\deltaδ is chosen before the run.
  • Pinned asymptotics. The goal's rate is the proof's display (3.3), stated as IsLittleO along atTop; the printed Theorem 3.2 states only well-definedness and convergence. "Order 1+p1+p1+p" is pinned as ∥xk+1−x∗∥≤C∥xk−x∗∥1+p\|x^{k+1}-x^*\| \le C\|x^k-x^*\|^{1+p}∥xk+1−x∗∥≤C∥xk−x∗∥1+p with δ\deltaδ and CCC uniform over runs. Every o(∥h∥)o(\|h\|)o(∥h∥) in (2.8), (2.9) and (2.17) is its ε\varepsilonε–δ\deltaδ form with a non-strict inequality ≤ε∥h∥\le \varepsilon\|h\|≤ε∥h∥, and every O(∥h∥1+p)O(\|h\|^{1+p})O(∥h∥1+p) is an explicit constant and radius.
  • The standing assumptions "FFF locally Lipschitzian" of Sections 2 and 3 are hypotheses of every statement.
  • The strong Fréchet derivative of Corollary 2.5 is Mathlib's HasStrictFDerivAt, which corrects the misprint F(x)F(x)F(x) for F(z)F(z)F(z) in the paper's display (2.16).

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the update is not written with a junk inverse (which would make a singular step "well defined"), the generalized Jacobian is the paper's nonempty set rather than one that could be empty, and the theorem quantifies over every run rather than asserting that some run converges.

A complete development needs Clarke's mean-value inclusion (2.2), compactness and upper semicontinuity of ∂F\partial F∂F for locally Lipschitz maps (via Rademacher's theorem, available in Mathlib), and perturbation bounds for inverses of linear maps. The generalized-Jacobian and semismoothness layer is reusable beyond this mission, in particular for Missions II and III of this series. Contributions of proofs of any milestone, and of general lemmas about ∂F\partial F∂F, are welcome.

Selected references

  • L. Qi, J. Sun, A nonsmooth version of Newton's method, Mathematical Programming 58 (1993) 353–367. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01581275
  • F. H. Clarke, Optimization and Nonsmooth Analysis, Wiley, 1983 (SIAM reprint 1990). https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971309
  • R. Mifflin, Semismooth and semiconvex functions in constrained optimization, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 15 (1977) 959–972. https://doi.org/10.1137/0315061
  • J.-S. Pang, Newton's method for B-differentiable equations, Mathematics of Operations Research 15 (1990) 311–341. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.15.2.311
  • J. M. Ortega, W. C. Rheinboldt, Iterative Solution of Nonlinear Equations in Several Variables, Academic Press, 1970 (SIAM reprint 2000). https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898719468
14 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Mathematical PhysicsNumber Theory·Captain: Lucas

String Theory (Tong) III: Modular Invariance of the One-Loop Partition FunctionTextbook

Motivation

At one loop, the worldsheet of a closed string is a torus, and the one-loop vacuum amplitude of the bosonic string is an integral over all conformally inequivalent tori. Two tori with modular parameters τ\tauτ and τ′\tau'τ′ are equivalent exactly when τ′=(aτ+b)/(cτ+d)\tau'=(a\tau+b)/(c\tau+d)τ′=(aτ+b)/(cτ+d) for an integer matrix of determinant one, so a consistent string amplitude must be built from SL(2,Z)SL(2,\mathbb Z)SL(2,Z)-invariant data. In David Tong's Cambridge Part III lecture notes (Section 6.4), the partition function of the bosonic string is computed in lightcone gauge and written in terms of the Dedekind eta function; the notes then observe that the measure and the integrand are individually modular invariant. This invariance is the mechanism by which string theory avoids the ultraviolet divergences of point-particle loops: the integration region is a fundamental domain that never reaches Im⁡τ→0\operatorname{Im}\tau\to0Imτ→0 (Polchinski 1986).

Setting

Write H={τ∈C:Im⁡τ>0}\mathbb H=\{\tau\in\mathbb C:\operatorname{Im}\tau>0\}H={τ∈C:Imτ>0}. A modular transformation is the map

τ⟼γτ=aτ+bcτ+d,a,b,c,d∈Z,ad−bc=1,(6.19)\tau\longmapsto \gamma\tau=\frac{a\tau+b}{c\tau+d},\qquad a,b,c,d\in\mathbb Z,\quad ad-bc=1, \qquad (6.19)τ⟼γτ=cτ+daτ+b​,a,b,c,d∈Z,ad−bc=1,(6.19)

generated by T:τ↦τ+1T:\tau\mapsto\tau+1T:τ↦τ+1 and S:τ↦−1/τS:\tau\mapsto-1/\tauS:τ↦−1/τ. With q=e2πiτq=e^{2\pi i\tau}q=e2πiτ the Dedekind eta function is

η(τ)=q1/24∏n=1∞(1−qn)=e2πiτ/24∏n=1∞(1−e2πinτ),\eta(\tau)=q^{1/24}\prod_{n=1}^\infty(1-q^n)=e^{2\pi i\tau/24}\prod_{n=1}^\infty\bigl(1-e^{2\pi i n\tau}\bigr),η(τ)=q1/24n=1∏∞​(1−qn)=e2πiτ/24n=1∏∞​(1−e2πinτ),

convergent and non-vanishing on H\mathbb HH. The partition function of a single free scalar field on the torus is, up to constant factors, (6.20)

Zscalar(τ)=1Im⁡τ 1∣η(τ)∣2,Z_{\text{scalar}}(\tau)=\frac{1}{\sqrt{\operatorname{Im}\tau}}\,\frac{1}{|\eta(\tau)|^{2}},Zscalar​(τ)=Imτ​1​∣η(τ)∣21​,

and the bosonic string partition function is

Zstring=∫Fd2τ(Im⁡τ)2  F(τ),F(τ)=(1Im⁡τ1η(τ) η(τ)‾)24=1(Im⁡τ)12 ∣η(τ)∣48,Z_{\text{string}}=\int_{\mathcal F}\frac{d^2\tau}{(\operatorname{Im}\tau)^2}\;F(\tau),\qquad F(\tau)=\left(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\operatorname{Im}\tau}}\frac{1}{\eta(\tau)\,\overline{\eta(\tau)}}\right)^{24}=\frac{1}{(\operatorname{Im}\tau)^{12}\,|\eta(\tau)|^{48}},Zstring​=∫F​(Imτ)2d2τ​F(τ),F(τ)=(Imτ​1​η(τ)η(τ)​1​)24=(Imτ)12∣η(τ)∣481​,

where F={∣τ∣≥1, ∣Re⁡τ∣≤12}\mathcal F=\{|\tau|\ge1,\ |\operatorname{Re}\tau|\le\tfrac12\}F={∣τ∣≥1, ∣Reτ∣≤21​} is the standard fundamental domain.

Formalization targets

Goal: the string integrand is modular invariant

For every τ∈H\tau\in\mathbb Hτ∈H and all a,b,c,d∈Za,b,c,d\in\mathbb Za,b,c,d∈Z with ad−bc=1ad-bc=1ad−bc=1,

F ⁣(aτ+bcτ+d)=F(τ).F\!\left(\frac{a\tau+b}{c\tau+d}\right)=F(\tau).F(cτ+daτ+b​)=F(τ).

Milestones (Section 6.4, in the order of the notes)

  1. SSS and TTT generate SL(2,Z)SL(2,\mathbb Z)SL(2,Z).
  2. Every τ∈H\tau\in\mathbb Hτ∈H is mapped into F\mathcal FF by some modular transformation.
  3. Im⁡(γτ)=Im⁡τ/∣cτ+d∣2\operatorname{Im}(\gamma\tau)=\operatorname{Im}\tau/|c\tau+d|^2Im(γτ)=Imτ/∣cτ+d∣2 and d(γτ)/dτ=1/(cτ+d)2d(\gamma\tau)/d\tau=1/(c\tau+d)^2d(γτ)/dτ=1/(cτ+d)2 (so d2τ↦d2τ/∣cτ+d∣4d^2\tau\mapsto d^2\tau/|c\tau+d|^4d2τ↦d2τ/∣cτ+d∣4).
  4. The measure d2τ/(Im⁡τ)2d^2\tau/(\operatorname{Im}\tau)^2d2τ/(Imτ)2 on H\mathbb HH is SL(2,Z)SL(2,\mathbb Z)SL(2,Z)-invariant.
  5. η(τ+1)=e2πi/24η(τ)\eta(\tau+1)=e^{2\pi i/24}\eta(\tau)η(τ+1)=e2πi/24η(τ).
  6. η(−1/τ)=−iτ η(τ)\eta(-1/\tau)=\sqrt{-i\tau}\,\eta(\tau)η(−1/τ)=−iτ​η(τ).
  7. ZscalarZ_{\text{scalar}}Zscalar​ is modular invariant.

Significance

The result. Modular invariance of the integrand is what makes the one-loop string amplitude well defined as an integral over the moduli space of tori, rather than over the whole upper half-plane: restricting to F\mathcal FF is only consistent because nothing depends on the representative. It is the first instance of a consistency condition that, in the superstring, constrains the allowed gauge groups and spectra.

Formalizing it. The eta transformation laws are classical (Apostol 1990, Ch. 3); Mathlib contains the definition of the eta function and results on SL(2,Z)SL(2,\mathbb Z)SL(2,Z) and its fundamental domain, but, to the mission author's knowledge, not the SSS-transformation law of η\etaη. The mission produces a self-contained formal statement of the physics claim "both the measure and the integrand are individually modular invariant" and asks for its proof; milestones 1–2 are expected to follow from existing Mathlib results, milestone 6 is the analytic core.

Difficulty

The TTT-law is immediate from the product. The SSS-law η(−1/τ)=−iτ η(τ)\eta(-1/\tau)=\sqrt{-i\tau}\,\eta(\tau)η(−1/τ)=−iτ​η(τ) is not visible from the product formula at all: it requires either Poisson summation / the Jacobi triple product for theta functions, or a Mellin-transform / Eisenstein-series argument (log⁡η\log\etalogη is an Eichler integral of E2E_2E2​), together with care about the branch of the square root. Passing from generators to all of SL(2,Z)SL(2,\mathbb Z)SL(2,Z) requires an induction on words in SSS and TTT in which the multiplier ∣cτ+d∣|c\tau+d|∣cτ+d∣ must be tracked.

Formalization scope

Points of H\mathbb HH are represented as complex numbers τ\tauτ with the hypothesis 0<Im⁡τ0<\operatorname{Im}\tau0<Imτ; a modular transformation is given by four integers with ad−bc=1ad-bc=1ad−bc=1 and acts by TongString.modularAction a b c d τ = (aτ+b)/(cτ+d). The eta function is defined directly by Tong's product formula as TongString.dedekindEta, using Mathlib's unconditional infinite product tprod. The square root in the SSS-law is the principal branch, (−iτ)1/2(-i\tau)^{1/2}(−iτ)1/2, which is the one intended since Re⁡(−iτ)>0\operatorname{Re}(-i\tau)>0Re(−iτ)>0. The invariant measure is formalized as the measure on C\mathbb CC with density (Im⁡τ)−2(\operatorname{Im}\tau)^{-2}(Imτ)−2 with respect to Lebesgue measure restricted to H\mathbb HH, and invariance as equality of push-forward measures. Constant prefactors that Tong explicitly drops (powers of α′\alpha'α′, 4π24\pi^24π2) are omitted. Because every statement is restricted to Im⁡τ>0\operatorname{Im}\tau>0Imτ>0, where η\etaη has no zeros, the reciprocal 1/∣η∣1/|\eta|1/∣η∣ is never a division by zero, so no statement is vacuous.

Selected references

  • D. Tong, String Theory, Cambridge Part III lecture notes, 2009, Sections 6.4.1–6.4.2. http://www.damtp.cam.ac.uk/user/tong/string.html (arXiv:0908.0333)
  • J. Polchinski, Evaluation of the one loop string path integral, Commun. Math. Phys. 104 (1986) 37. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01210927
  • T. M. Apostol, Modular Functions and Dirichlet Series in Number Theory, 2nd ed., Springer GTM 41, 1990, Chapter 3. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4612-0999-7
  • J.-P. Serre, A Course in Arithmetic, Springer GTM 7, 1973, Chapter VII.
12 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Mathematical Physics·Captain: Lucas

Weinberg 1965: Infrared Photons and Gravitons — the soft exponents A and BResearch Paper

Motivation

When a charged particle scatters, it can radiate photons of arbitrarily low energy. In perturbative quantum electrodynamics this shows up as infrared divergences: loop integrals over very soft virtual photons diverge logarithmically, and so do the rates for emitting soft real photons. The standard resolution, due to Bloch and Nordsieck and systematized by Yennie, Frautschi and Suura, is that the divergences cancel in any rate that sums over undetectable soft emissions below an energy resolution EEE.

S. Weinberg's paper Infrared Photons and Gravitons (Phys. Rev. 140, B516 (1965)) shows that the same mechanism works for gravitons, derives explicit formulas for the exponents that control the soft factors, and proves that the extra "collinear" divergences produced by massless hard particles cancel for gravitons but not for photons. The soft-graviton factor (2.5)–(2.7) used there is the factor that appears in Weinberg's soft graviton theorem, and the spectrum formula is used in the paper to estimate the gravitational radiation from thermal collisions in the sun.

Timeline.

  • 1937 — Bloch and Nordsieck: soft-photon divergences cancel between virtual and real emission.
  • 1961 — Yennie, Frautschi and Suura: all-orders exponentiation of soft-photon factors in QED.
  • 1965 — Weinberg: the analogous treatment for gravitons, closed forms (2.16) and (2.26) for the exponents AAA and BBB, cancellation of collinear divergences for gravitons (Sec. III), and the Coulomb-phase result conjectured by Dalitz (Sec. V).

Setting

Work in units ℏ=c=1\hbar=c=1ℏ=c=1 with the paper's metric: for four-vectors p=(p,p0)p=(\mathbf p,p^0)p=(p,p0) and q=(q,q0)q=(\mathbf q,q^0)q=(q,q0), p⋅q=p⋅q−p0q0p\cdot q=\mathbf p\cdot\mathbf q-p^0q^0p⋅q=p⋅q−p0q0. A process α→β\alpha\to\betaα→β has finitely many external lines nnn; line nnn has mass mnm_nmn​, three-momentum pn∈R3\mathbf p_n\in\mathbb R^3pn​∈R3, on-shell energy En=∣pn∣2+mn2E_n=\sqrt{|\mathbf p_n|^2+m_n^2}En​=∣pn​∣2+mn2​​, charge ene_nen​, and sign ηn=+1\eta_n=+1ηn​=+1 (outgoing) or −1-1−1 (incoming). The relative velocity of lines n,mn,mn,m is

βnm=[1−mn2mm2(pn⋅pm)2]1/2.\beta_{nm}=\Bigl[1-\frac{m_n^2m_m^2}{(p_n\cdot p_m)^2}\Bigr]^{1/2}.βnm​=[1−(pn​⋅pm​)2mn2​mm2​​]1/2.

For a unit vector q^\hat qq^​ (the direction of a soft quantum) define the photon and graviton angular functions

A(q^)=12(2π)3∑n,menemηnηm(pn⋅pm)[En−pn⋅q^][Em−pm⋅q^],B(q^)=8πG2(2π)3∑n,mηnηm{(pn⋅pm)2−12mn2mm2}[En−pn⋅q^][Em−pm⋅q^],A(\hat q)=\frac{1}{2(2\pi)^3}\sum_{n,m}\frac{e_ne_m\eta_n\eta_m(p_n\cdot p_m)}{[E_n-\mathbf p_n\cdot\hat q][E_m-\mathbf p_m\cdot\hat q]},\qquad B(\hat q)=\frac{8\pi G}{2(2\pi)^3}\sum_{n,m}\frac{\eta_n\eta_m\{(p_n\cdot p_m)^2-\frac12m_n^2m_m^2\}}{[E_n-\mathbf p_n\cdot\hat q][E_m-\mathbf p_m\cdot\hat q]},A(q^​)=2(2π)31​n,m∑​[En​−pn​⋅q^​][Em​−pm​⋅q^​]en​em​ηn​ηm​(pn​⋅pm​)​,B(q^​)=2(2π)38πG​n,m∑​[En​−pn​⋅q^​][Em​−pm​⋅q^​]ηn​ηm​{(pn​⋅pm​)2−21​mn2​mm2​}​,

and the infrared exponents A=∫d2Ω A(q^)A=\int d^2\Omega\,A(\hat q)A=∫d2ΩA(q^​) and B=∫d2Ω B(q^)B=\int d^2\Omega\,B(\hat q)B=∫d2ΩB(q^​), integrals over the unit sphere against surface measure. With infrared cutoff λ\lambdaλ and dividing point Λ\LambdaΛ, virtual soft quanta multiply a rate by (λ/Λ)A(\lambda/\Lambda)^A(λ/Λ)A or (λ/Λ)B(\lambda/\Lambda)^B(λ/Λ)B, and summing over real soft emission of total energy at most EEE gives the cutoff-free factors (E/Λ)Ab(A)(E/\Lambda)^Ab(A)(E/Λ)Ab(A) and (E/Λ)Bb(B)(E/\Lambda)^Bb(B)(E/Λ)Bb(B) of Eqs. (2.51)–(2.52).

Formalization targets

Goal — Eq. (2.26)

For masses mn>0m_n>0mn​>0,

B=G2π∑n,mηnηmmnmm1+βnm2βnm(1−βnm2)1/2ln⁡(1+βnm1−βnm)=Gπ∑n,mηnmnηmmmf(βnm),B=\frac{G}{2\pi}\sum_{n,m}\eta_n\eta_mm_nm_m\frac{1+\beta_{nm}^2}{\beta_{nm}(1-\beta_{nm}^2)^{1/2}}\ln\Bigl(\frac{1+\beta_{nm}}{1-\beta_{nm}}\Bigr)=\frac{G}{\pi}\sum_{n,m}\eta_nm_n\eta_mm_mf(\beta_{nm}),B=2πG​n,m∑​ηn​ηm​mn​mm​βnm​(1−βnm2​)1/21+βnm2​​ln(1−βnm​1+βnm​​)=πG​n,m∑​ηn​mn​ηm​mm​f(βnm​),

with f(0)=1f(0)=1f(0)=1 for the diagonal terms. This is the formula for graviton bremsstrahlung in an arbitrary collision.

Milestones

  1. Sec. II.2 — summed over the N!N!N! orderings, the multiple pole factors of NNN soft emissions from one line factorize into single-emission factors.
  2. Eq. (2.13) — the real part of the virtual-photon exponent equals −Aln⁡(Λ/λ)-A\ln(\Lambda/\lambda)−Aln(Λ/λ).
  3. Eq. (2.16) — A=−18π2∑n,mηnηmenemβnm−1ln⁡1+βnm1−βnmA=-\frac{1}{8\pi^2}\sum_{n,m}\eta_n\eta_me_ne_m\beta_{nm}^{-1}\ln\frac{1+\beta_{nm}}{1-\beta_{nm}}A=−8π21​∑n,m​ηn​ηm​en​em​βnm−1​ln1−βnm​1+βnm​​.
  4. Eq. (2.14) — A≥0A\ge0A≥0 under charge conservation.
  5. Eq. (2.24) — B≥0B\ge0B≥0 under energy–momentum conservation.
  6. Eqs. (3.4)–(3.5) — if one line becomes massless, BBB stays finite (the ln⁡m1\ln m_1lnm1​ terms cancel by energy–momentum conservation).
  7. Eq. (3.3) — for photons the corresponding limit is A→+∞A\to+\inftyA→+∞ when the massless line is charged.
  8. Eq. (4.9) — f(β)=1+116β2+6340β4+O(β6)f(\beta)=1+\frac{11}{6}\beta^2+\frac{63}{40}\beta^4+O(\beta^6)f(β)=1+611​β2+4063​β4+O(β6).

Significance

The exponents AAA and BBB are the only process-dependent quantities in the soft factors: once they are known in closed form, the infrared behaviour of any rate, the shape EAE^AEA or EBE^BEB of the soft spectrum, and the soft power spectrum E dΓ=B Γ0 dEE\,d\Gamma=B\,\Gamma^0\,dEEdΓ=BΓ0dE (2.53) follow. The Sec. III cancellation is the statement that gravitation, unlike massless electrodynamics or Yang–Mills theory, is free of unremovable collinear divergences at this level; the paper uses the contrast to argue that charged massless particles are problematic. The expansion (4.9) feeds the nonrelativistic quadrupole formula (4.13) behind the solar estimate.

The paper's arguments are informal physics derivations. This mission makes the mathematical content of those derivations precise and machine-checkable: the angular integrals, the sign statements, the limiting behaviour as a mass goes to zero, and the combinatorial factorization.

Difficulty

The closed forms need the solid-angle integral of a product of two denominators [En−pn⋅q^]−1[Em−pm⋅q^]−1[E_n-\mathbf p_n\cdot\hat q]^{-1}[E_m-\mathbf p_m\cdot\hat q]^{-1}[En​−pn​⋅q^​]−1[Em​−pm​⋅q^​]−1 for two arbitrary, non-collinear momenta; the one-denominator case is a textbook integral in polar coordinates, but the two-denominator case does not reduce to it by an obvious choice of axis. The positivity statements are false without the conservation laws, so any proof must use them in an essential way. The massless-limit statements concern the interplay of a logarithmically divergent term with a coefficient that vanishes only at the limiting configuration, so a termwise limit fails.

Formalization scope

Three-momenta live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin 3); energies are the on-shell values ∣p∣2+m2\sqrt{|\mathbf p|^2+m^2}∣p∣2+m2​ and are not free variables. Solid-angle integrals are Bochner integrals on the unit sphere against Mathlib's volume.toSphere (total mass 4π4\pi4π). External lines are indexed by an arbitrary Fintype; the signs ηn\eta_nηn​ are real numbers constrained to ±1\pm1±1 by hypothesis. Sums over n,mn,mn,m run over all ordered pairs, including n=mn=mn=m, where βnn=0\beta_{nn}=0βnn​=0; the kernels β−1ln⁡1+β1−β\beta^{-1}\ln\frac{1+\beta}{1-\beta}β−1ln1−β1+β​ and fff are extended by their limits 222 and 111 at β=0\beta=0β=0, so the formulas are not trivialized by Lean's convention x/0=0x/0=0x/0=0. The printed Eq. (4.6) has an exponent 1/21/21/2 on the logarithm's argument that contradicts (2.26), (4.5) and (4.9); the definition of fff drops it. The −iηϵ-i\eta\epsilon−iηϵ prescriptions are suppressed. The δ(q2)\delta(q^2)δ(q2) integration in (2.13) is carried out, leaving an integral over the shell λ≤∣q∣≤Λ\lambda\le|\mathbf q|\le\Lambdaλ≤∣q∣≤Λ. Positivity is stated as ≥0\ge0≥0, because A=B=0A=B=0A=B=0 in degenerate configurations. Sec. IV beyond (4.9) (the velocity expansion (4.8), the quadrupole formula (4.13), the solar estimate) and the Coulomb phases of Sec. V are out of scope for this mission.

A complete development needs solid-angle integration on S2S^2S2 (a spherical-coordinates change of variables for volume.toSphere), integration in polar coordinates on R3\mathbb R^3R3, and elementary inequalities for Minkowski products of timelike and null vectors. These are reusable beyond this mission, and contributions of them as separate lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Weinberg, Infrared Photons and Gravitons, Phys. Rev. 140, B516 (1965). https://doi.org/10.1103/PhysRev.140.B516
  • F. Bloch and A. Nordsieck, Note on the Radiation Field of the Electron, Phys. Rev. 52, 54 (1937). https://doi.org/10.1103/PhysRev.52.54
  • D. R. Yennie, S. C. Frautschi and H. Suura, The infrared divergence phenomena and high-energy processes, Ann. Phys. 13, 379 (1961). https://doi.org/10.1016/0003-4916(61)90151-8
10 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Mathematical Physics·Captain: Lucas

Missing baryons from stacked SZ filaments: the model and statistics of de Graaff et al. (2019)Research Paper

Motivation

Big-bang nucleosynthesis and the acoustic peaks of the cosmic microwave background fix the baryon density of the universe to about 5% of its total energy density, but in the low-redshift universe only some 10% of those baryons are seen in galaxies, with another 10% in the circumgalactic and intracluster medium. Simulations place the remainder — the missing baryons — in a diffuse warm-hot intergalactic medium (WHIM) at 10510^5105–10710^7107 K, spread along the filaments of the cosmic web. Absorption-line studies and X-ray emission from individual filaments probe the cool and the hot ends of that range respectively, leaving the bulk poorly constrained.

de Graaff, Cai, Heymans & Peacock (2019) attack the problem statistically, by stacking the Planck Compton-yyy map over 1 020 3341\,020\,3341020334 pairs of CMASS galaxies and measuring the residual signal in the bridge between each pair. Interpreting that residual requires an analytic model of a filament, and that model — a cylinder with a Gaussian cross-section, convolved with the instrument beam — is what this mission formalizes. The same model, applied to the CMB lensing convergence map, converts the measured signals into a gas density and temperature, and hence into a baryon fraction.

Setting

A filament is modelled as an infinite cylinder seen side-on. In the plane perpendicular to the filament axis, write ℓ\ellℓ for the line-of-sight coordinate and r⊥r_\perpr⊥​ for the transverse coordinate on the sky. The electron density is taken to be a two-dimensional Gaussian

ne(ℓ,r⊥)=n0exp⁡ ⁣(−ℓ22σ2)exp⁡ ⁣(−r⊥22(σ2+σB2)),n_e(\ell, r_\perp) = n_0 \exp\!\left(-\frac{\ell^2}{2\sigma^2}\right)\exp\!\left(-\frac{r_\perp^2}{2(\sigma^2+\sigma_B^2)}\right),ne​(ℓ,r⊥​)=n0​exp(−2σ2ℓ2​)exp(−2(σ2+σB2​)r⊥2​​),

with central density n0n_0n0​, intrinsic width σ\sigmaσ and beam width σB\sigma_BσB​; the transverse direction, unlike the line of sight, is smoothed by the instrument beam, which is why σB\sigma_BσB​ appears only there.

The Compton yyy parameter of a line of sight is the optical-depth-weighted temperature of the scattering electrons,

y=kBTeσTmec2∫ne dℓ,y = \frac{k_B T_e \sigma_T}{m_e c^2}\int n_e \, d\ell,y=me​c2kB​Te​σT​​∫ne​dℓ,

with kBk_BkB​ the Boltzmann constant, σT\sigma_TσT​ the Thomson cross-section, mec2m_e c^2me​c2 the electron rest energy and TeT_eTe​ the electron temperature, assumed constant across the filament. The convergence κ\kappaκ of CMB lensing is the analogous projection of the total matter density contrast δ=ρ/ρˉ−1\delta = \rho/\bar\rho - 1δ=ρ/ρˉ​−1,

κ=3H02Ωm2c2∫0DSDL(DS−DL)DS δa dDL,\kappa = \frac{3H_0^2\Omega_m}{2c^2}\int_0^{D_S} \frac{D_L(D_S-D_L)}{D_S}\,\frac{\delta}{a}\, dD_L,κ=2c23H02​Ωm​​∫0DS​​DS​DL​(DS​−DL​)​aδ​dDL​,

with H0H_0H0​ the Hubble constant, Ωm\Omega_mΩm​ the matter density parameter, aaa the scale factor and DL,DSD_L, D_SDL​,DS​ the comoving distances of lens and source. For a structure thin compared with the lensing kernel, the geometric factor is constant across it and κ\kappaκ reduces to a line-of-sight integral of δ\deltaδ against a fixed prefactor.

The significance of the measurement is assessed with a second, statistical layer. A stack of NNN binned profiles yiky^k_iyik​ (kkk the map index, iii the bin index) has mean profile yˉi=1N∑kyik\bar y_i = \frac1N\sum_k y^k_iyˉ​i​=N1​∑k​yik​ and covariance estimator Ci,j=1N∑k(yik−yˉi)(yjk−yˉj)C_{i,j} = \frac1N\sum_k (y^k_i-\bar y_i)(y^k_j-\bar y_j)Ci,j​=N1​∑k​(yik​−yˉ​i​)(yjk​−yˉ​j​); the deviation of the mean profile from zero is measured by χ2=∑i,jyˉi(C−1)i,jyˉj\chi^2 = \sum_{i,j}\bar y_i (C^{-1})_{i,j}\bar y_jχ2=∑i,j​yˉ​i​(C−1)i,j​yˉ​j​. Because the stacked maps overlap on the sky, the paper replaces CCC by a jackknife covariance built from NsubN_{\mathrm{sub}}Nsub​ sky sub-samples, Ci,jJK=Nsub−1Nsub∑k(yik−yˉi)(yjk−yˉj)C^{JK}_{i,j} = \frac{N_{\mathrm{sub}}-1}{N_{\mathrm{sub}}}\sum_k (y^k_i-\bar y_i)(y^k_j-\bar y_j)Ci,jJK​=Nsub​Nsub​−1​∑k​(yik​−yˉ​i​)(yjk​−yˉ​j​), and multiplies the inverse by the Hartlap factor (Nsub−n−2)/(Nsub−1)(N_{\mathrm{sub}}-n-2)/(N_{\mathrm{sub}}-1)(Nsub​−n−2)/(Nsub​−1), with nnn the number of bins.

Measurements enter through two numbers: the mean Compton parameter yˉ\bar{y}yˉ​ and the mean convergence κˉ\bar{\kappa}κˉ over the boxed filament region, together with the empirical observation that the peak of each profile is close to 1/0.91/0.91/0.9 times its mean. Every statement in this mission imposes that calibration as a hypothesis on the model.

Formalization targets

Goal — total electron content, Eq. (A.4)

Ne  =  L∬ne dℓ dr⊥  =  yˉ0.9 mec2kBTeσT 2π L σ2+σB2.N_e \;=\; L \iint n_e\, d\ell\, dr_\perp \;=\; \frac{\bar y}{0.9}\,\frac{m_e c^2}{k_B T_e \sigma_T}\,\sqrt{2\pi}\, L\, \sqrt{\sigma^2+\sigma_B^2}.Ne​=L∬ne​dℓdr⊥​=0.9yˉ​​kB​Te​σT​me​c2​2π​Lσ2+σB2​​.

This is the quantity the paper's baryon budget is computed from: given the measured yˉ\bar yyˉ​, an assumed temperature TeT_eTe​ and the beam width, it fixes the number of electrons in a filament of length LLL.

Milestone — projected profile, Eq. (A.2)

y(r⊥)=2π n0σ kBTeσTmec2exp⁡ ⁣(−r⊥22(σ2+σB2)).y(r_\perp) = \sqrt{2\pi}\, n_0\sigma\,\frac{k_B T_e \sigma_T}{m_e c^2}\exp\!\left(-\frac{r_\perp^2}{2(\sigma^2+\sigma_B^2)}\right).y(r⊥​)=2π​n0​σme​c2kB​Te​σT​​exp(−2(σ2+σB2​)r⊥2​​).

Milestone — central density, Eq. (A.3)

n0=yˉ/0.92π σ⋅mec2kBTeσT.n_0 = \frac{\bar y/0.9}{\sqrt{2\pi}\,\sigma}\cdot\frac{m_e c^2}{k_B T_e \sigma_T}.n0​=2π​σyˉ​/0.9​⋅kB​Te​σT​me​c2​.

Milestone — lensing counterpart, Eq. (A.5)

δ0=κˉ/0.92π σ⋅2ac23H02Ωm⋅DSDL(DS−DL).\delta_0 = \frac{\bar\kappa/0.9}{\sqrt{2\pi}\,\sigma}\cdot\frac{2ac^2}{3H_0^2\Omega_m}\cdot\frac{D_S}{D_L(D_S-D_L)}.δ0​=2π​σκˉ/0.9​⋅3H02​Ωm​2ac2​⋅DL​(DS​−DL​)DS​​.

Milestone — beam dominance, the remark after Eq. (A.4)

σB≤σ2+σB2≤σB(1+σ22σB2).\sigma_B \le \sqrt{\sigma^2+\sigma_B^2}\le \sigma_B\left(1+\frac{\sigma^2}{2\sigma_B^2}\right).σB​≤σ2+σB2​​≤σB​(1+2σB2​σ2​).

Milestone — the covariance estimators, Eqs. (3) and (5)-(6)

Both CCC and CJKC^{JK}CJK are symmetric and positive semidefinite, for every data set and every sample size.

Milestone — the significance statistic, Eq. (4)

C positive definite  ⟹  χ2=∑i,jyˉi(C−1)i,jyˉj≥0.C \text{ positive definite} \implies \chi^2 = \sum_{i,j}\bar y_i (C^{-1})_{i,j}\bar y_j \ge 0.C positive definite⟹χ2=i,j∑​yˉ​i​(C−1)i,j​yˉ​j​≥0.

Milestone — the Hartlap correction, Eq. (7)

∑i,jyˉi[Nsub−n−2Nsub−1C−1]i,jyˉj=Nsub−n−2Nsub−1∑i,jyˉi(C−1)i,jyˉj.\sum_{i,j}\bar y_i\left[\frac{N_{\mathrm{sub}}-n-2}{N_{\mathrm{sub}}-1}C^{-1}\right]_{i,j}\bar y_j = \frac{N_{\mathrm{sub}}-n-2}{N_{\mathrm{sub}}-1}\sum_{i,j}\bar y_i (C^{-1})_{i,j}\bar y_j.i,j∑​yˉ​i​[Nsub​−1Nsub​−n−2​C−1]i,j​yˉ​j​=Nsub​−1Nsub​−n−2​i,j∑​yˉ​i​(C−1)i,j​yˉ​j​.

Significance

The four displayed identities are the entire inferential chain from two stacked maps to a baryon fraction. Eq. (A.2) says what the model predicts for the observable; Eq. (A.3) inverts it at the filament axis; Eq. (A.4) turns the inversion into a total electron count, from which the paper obtains gas at (5.5±2.9) ρˉb(5.5\pm2.9)\,\bar\rho_b(5.5±2.9)ρˉ​b​ and T=(2.7±1.7)×106T=(2.7\pm1.7)\times10^6T=(2.7±1.7)×106 K, accounting for 11±7%11\pm7\%11±7% of the cosmic baryon budget; Eq. (A.5) supplies the independent lensing constraint that breaks the density–temperature degeneracy of the SZ measurement alone. The statistical milestones cover the other half of the analysis: the covariance estimators of Eqs. (3) and (5)-(6) that turn a stack into an error bar, the nonnegativity of the χ2\chi^2χ2 of Eq. (4) that is converted into the quoted 2.9σ2.9\sigma2.9σ, and the Hartlap rescaling of Eq. (7). The beam-dominance milestone quantifies the paper's claim that the result barely depends on the one free shape parameter, the intrinsic width σ\sigmaσ, which is taken from simulations rather than measured.

Formalizing them contributes a machine-checked derivation layer for a widely used observational technique: the projection of a Gaussian cylinder onto a Compton-yyy or convergence map, and the inversion of that projection, recur throughout stacked-SZ and stacked-lensing analyses. What this mission adds over the paper is a statement of each identity with all its hypotheses exposed — which positivity conditions are needed, which parameters genuinely drop out — rather than a new physical result. The physics is not re-derived and the measurement is not re-analysed; the empirical inputs yˉ\bar yyˉ​, κˉ\bar\kappaκˉ and the peak-to-mean ratio 1/0.91/0.91/0.9 enter as hypotheses, not as claims.

Difficulty

The identities are Gaussian integrals, so the mathematical depth is modest; the difficulty is bookkeeping and faithfulness. Three specific traps. First, the line-of-sight and transverse directions have different widths — σ\sigmaσ against σ2+σB2\sqrt{\sigma^2+\sigma_B^2}σ2+σB2​​ — and the asymmetry is what makes the final answer depend on the beam; a formalization that symmetrizes them is a different theorem. Second, the paper's n0n_0n0​ is not free: it is pinned by the calibration ypeak=yˉ/0.9y_{\text{peak}} = \bar y/0.9ypeak​=yˉ​/0.9, so the goal must carry that equation as a hypothesis rather than substituting a closed form for n0n_0n0​ silently. Third, the total electron count is an iterated integral over the plane, and the inner and outer variables must be kept in the paper's order.

Formalization scope

Everything is stated over R\mathbb{R}R with no units, so every physical constant is an explicit real variable; integrals are Bochner integrals over the whole real line with Lebesgue measure, which return 000 on a non-integrable integrand. The definition bundle fixes the model once — the SZ prefactor, the Gaussian cylinder profile, the Compton parameter, the thin-lens convergence prefactor, the convergence and the total electron content — and every statement is phrased against it. The convergence definition is the thin-lens specialization of Eq. (2): the geometric kernel is a constant prefactor, not an integral over lens distance, and the mission does not claim the reduction from the full Eq. (2) to that form.

Degenerate readings are ruled out as follows. The calibration hypotheses are satisfiable for every admissible choice of constants, so no statement is vacuous; conversely they genuinely constrain the central amplitude, so no statement holds for a trivial reason. The positivity hypotheses are the minimal ones that make the denominators nonzero, and the widths enter as σ>0\sigma > 0σ>0 with σB\sigma_BσB​ unrestricted, so the beam-free case σB=0\sigma_B = 0σB​=0 is included rather than excluded. The statistical layer is finite-dimensional: profiles are real arrays indexed by a finite bin type, covariances are real matrices, and matrix inversion is the nonsingular inverse, which returns the zero matrix on a singular argument — hence the positive-definiteness hypothesis in the χ2\chi^2χ2 milestone. Counts are natural numbers but all arithmetic in the prefactors is performed after casting to the reals, so Nsub−n−2N_{\mathrm{sub}} - n - 2Nsub​−n−2 is a genuine real subtraction and may be negative. The statistical statements assert the structural properties of the estimators as written; they do not assert unbiasedness, nor the reduction C→C/NC \to C/NC→C/N for the covariance of a mean, nor any property of the resampling scheme. Only Mathlib's Gaussian-integral, measure-theory and positive-semidefinite-matrix API is needed; no new infrastructure is required, and the resulting projection lemmas are reusable for any other stacked-profile analysis.

Selected references

  • A. de Graaff, Y.-C. Cai, C. Heymans, J. A. Peacock, Probing the missing baryons with the Sunyaev-Zel'dovich effect from filaments, Astronomy & Astrophysics 624, A48 (2019). doi:10.1051/0004-6361/201935159
  • R. A. Sunyaev, Y. B. Zeldovich, The Observations of Relic Radiation as a Test of the Nature of X-Ray Radiation from the Clusters of Galaxies, Comments on Astrophysics and Space Physics 4, 173 (1972).
  • Planck Collaboration XXII, Planck 2015 results. XXII. A map of the thermal Sunyaev-Zeldovich effect, A&A 594, A22 (2016). doi:10.1051/0004-6361/201525826
  • Planck Collaboration XV, Planck 2015 results. XV. Gravitational lensing, A&A 594, A15 (2016). doi:10.1051/0004-6361/201525941
  • J. Hartlap, P. Simon, P. Schneider, Why your model parameter confidences might be too optimistic: unbiased estimation of the inverse covariance matrix, A&A 464, 399 (2007). doi:10.1051/0004-6361:20066170
  • H. Tanimura et al., A search for warm/hot gas filaments between pairs of SDSS Luminous Red Galaxies, MNRAS 483, 223 (2019). doi:10.1093/mnras/sty3118
11 thms3 active usersReviewed
🏆Completed
Mathematical Physics·Captain: Lucas

Hubble's Law: The Kinematics of a Uniformly Expanding UniverseTextbook

Motivation

Hubble's law — officially the Hubble–Lemaître law — is the observation that galaxies recede from us at a speed proportional to their distance, v=H0Dv = H_0 Dv=H0​D. It is the first observational basis for the expansion of the universe and one of the standard pieces of evidence cited for the Big Bang model. Georges Lemaître derived the proportionality from relativistic cosmology in 1927; Edwin Hubble published the observational relation in 1929, building on Vesto Slipher's redshifts and Henrietta Swan Leavitt's Cepheid distance scale. Alexander Friedmann had already shown in 1922 that the Einstein field equations admit expanding solutions, with an expansion rate governed by what is now called the scale factor.

Behind the astronomy sits a piece of elementary mathematics that is rarely written out in full: in a spatially homogeneous expansion, the linear velocity–distance relation is forced, it holds with the same constant for every observer, and the Hubble "constant" is in fact a function of time whose evolution is fixed by a single dimensionless parameter. This mission formalizes that kinematic core: the statements are about the scale factor and its derivatives, and involve no Einstein equations.

Setting

A scale factor is a function a:R→Ra : \mathbb{R} \to \mathbb{R}a:R→R of cosmic time ttt. A comoving point is labelled by a fixed coordinate x∈R3\mathbf{x} \in \mathbb{R}^3x∈R3 (with the Euclidean norm), and its proper position at time ttt is

Xx(t)  =  a(t) x.\mathbf{X}_{\mathbf{x}}(t) \;=\; a(t)\,\mathbf{x}.Xx​(t)=a(t)x.

The proper distance between the comoving points x\mathbf{x}x and y\mathbf{y}y is

Dx,y(t)  =  ∥a(t)x−a(t)y∥.D_{\mathbf{x},\mathbf{y}}(t) \;=\; \lVert a(t)\mathbf{x} - a(t)\mathbf{y}\rVert .Dx,y​(t)=∥a(t)x−a(t)y∥.

The Hubble parameter and the dimensionless deceleration parameter are

H(t)  =  a˙(t)a(t),q(t)  =  − a¨(t) a(t)a˙(t)2.H(t) \;=\; \frac{\dot a(t)}{a(t)},\qquad q(t) \;=\; -\,\frac{\ddot a(t)\,a(t)}{\dot a(t)^{2}} .H(t)=a(t)a˙(t)​,q(t)=−a˙(t)2a¨(t)a(t)​.

H0H_0H0​ denotes the present-day value of HHH; the name "Hubble constant" refers to the fact that HHH is constant in space at a fixed time, not in time.

Target

The goal theorem is the idealized Hubble law, stated in the source as a theorem of Euclidean geometry: any two points moving away from the origin, each along a straight line and with speed proportional to its distance from the origin, move away from each other with a speed proportional to their distance apart. Formally, for H≥0H \ge 0H≥0, a time ttt and curves p,q:R→R3p, q : \mathbb{R} \to \mathbb{R}^3p,q:R→R3 with

p′(t)=H p(t),q′(t)=H q(t),p'(t) = H\,p(t), \qquad q'(t) = H\,q(t),p′(t)=Hp(t),q′(t)=Hq(t),

the separation satisfies

dds∣s=t(p(s)−q(s))  =  H (p(t)−q(t)),∥H (p(t)−q(t))∥  =  H ∥p(t)−q(t)∥.\frac{d}{ds}\Big|_{s=t}\big(p(s) - q(s)\big) \;=\; H\,\big(p(t) - q(t)\big), \qquad \big\lVert H\,(p(t)-q(t))\big\rVert \;=\; H\,\lVert p(t)-q(t)\rVert .dsd​​s=t​(p(s)−q(s))=H(p(t)−q(t)),​H(p(t)−q(t))​=H∥p(t)−q(t)∥.

The relative velocity is parallel to the separation vector and its magnitude is HHH times the separation, with the same HHH for every pair — so no comoving observer occupies a distinguished centre of the expansion.

The milestones supply the cosmological content that surrounds this geometric fact:

  1. proper distances scale as D(t)=(a(t)/a(t0))D(t0)D(t) = \big(a(t)/a(t_0)\big) D(t_0)D(t)=(a(t)/a(t0​))D(t0​);
  2. a comoving point has velocity H(t)H(t)H(t) times its proper position vector;
  3. Hubble's law itself, D˙(t)=H(t) D(t)\dot D(t) = H(t)\,D(t)D˙(t)=H(t)D(t);
  4. the evolution law H˙=−(1+q)H2\dot H = -(1+q)H^{2}H˙=−(1+q)H2;
  5. the zero-deceleration case: if q≡0q \equiv 0q≡0 then H(t)=1/tH(t) = 1/tH(t)=1/t, with ttt the time since the Big Bang, so the Hubble time 1/H1/H1/H is exactly the age;
  6. a constant Hubble parameter forces exponential growth a(t)=a(t0)eH0(t−t0)a(t) = a(t_0)e^{H_0(t-t_0)}a(t)=a(t0​)eH0​(t−t0​);
  7. the small-redshift limit: with 1+z=a(t0)/a(te)1 + z = a(t_0)/a(t_\mathrm{e})1+z=a(t0​)/a(te​), the ratio z/(t0−te)z/(t_0 - t_\mathrm{e})z/(t0​−te​) tends to H(t0)H(t_0)H(t0​) as te→t0t_\mathrm{e} \to t_0te​→t0​, which is the z≈H0D/cz \approx H_0 D/cz≈H0​D/c form of the law used observationally.

Significance

The result itself is elementary but load-bearing: it is what licenses reading a linear redshift–distance diagram as evidence for uniform expansion rather than for a privileged position in space, and items 4–6 are the statements through which cosmological observations (the sign of qqq, the approach of qqq to −1-1−1 in Λ\LambdaΛCDM) are turned into claims about the past and future behaviour of HHH and aaa.

Formalizing it produces a small, reusable Lean layer for expansion kinematics: the scale factor, the Hubble and deceleration parameters, proper position and proper distance, with the differentiation lemmas that connect them. The platform already carries Friedmann-equation missions that fix the dynamics of aaa; this mission is the kinematic complement, and its Hubble parameter is the same function a˙/a\dot a/aa˙/a that those developments use. Nothing here is an open research problem: every statement is a known textbook fact, and the work is the formalization.

Difficulty

The mathematical content is a few lines of calculus, so the difficulty is entirely in the encoding. Three places are easy to get wrong. First, proper distance is defined through a norm, so the identity ∥a(t)v∥=a(t)∥v∥\lVert a(t)v\rVert = a(t)\lVert v\rVert∥a(t)v∥=a(t)∥v∥ needs positivity of aaa, and differentiating it needs positivity on a neighbourhood, not just at the point. Second, qqq is defined by a quotient with a˙2\dot a^{2}a˙2 in the denominator: in Lean division by zero returns zero, so a statement about qqq that forgets a˙(t)≠0\dot a(t) \ne 0a˙(t)=0 silently changes meaning. Third, milestone 5 propagates a hypothesis stated on (0,∞)(0,\infty)(0,∞) down to the endpoint t=0t=0t=0, where the Big Bang condition a(0)=0a(0)=0a(0)=0 lives; the continuity argument at the endpoint is the only step with any technical content.

Formalization scope

Time is R\mathbb{R}R and space is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin 3); derivatives are Mathlib's deriv / HasDerivAt, so "velocity" is always a derivative at a point rather than a difference quotient. Smoothness is assumed exactly where it is used: differentiability at a single time for the first-order statements, ContDiff ℝ 2 for the statements involving a¨\ddot aa¨. Positivity of the scale factor is stated explicitly wherever it is needed, as is a˙(t)≠0\dot a(t) \ne 0a˙(t)=0 in the statements mentioning qqq.

Degenerate readings are excluded: the goal's hypotheses are satisfiable (any pair of comoving points in an expanding universe satisfies them, as milestone 2 shows), and the milestones are non-vacuous for concrete scale factors such as a(t)=ta(t) = ta(t)=t and a(t)=eH0ta(t) = e^{H_0 t}a(t)=eH0​t. The goal theorem's second clause is a norm identity that is true for every H≥0H \ge 0H≥0; it carries the "speed proportional to distance" half of the source's statement, while the first clause carries the "moving away from each other along the separation" half.

The definition layer is a single self-contained file (scale factor derived quantities, proper position, proper distance); it is reusable by any mission about expansion kinematics. Contributions of the milestone proofs, and of variants such as the redshift relation 1+z=a(t0)/a(te)1+z = a(t_0)/a(t_\mathrm{e})1+z=a(t0​)/a(te​) derived from null geodesics rather than assumed, are welcome.

Selected references

  • Wikipedia, "Hubble's law" (Hubble–Lemaître law), https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hubble%27s_law — the source text for this mission, in particular the sections "Recessional velocity", "Time-dependence of Hubble parameter", "Idealized Hubble's law" and "Ultimate fate and age of the universe".
  • E. Hubble, "A relation between distance and radial velocity among extra-galactic nebulae", PNAS 15 (1929) 168–173, https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.15.3.168.
  • G. Lemaître, "Un univers homogène de masse constante et de rayon croissant rendant compte de la vitesse radiale des nébuleuses extra-galactiques", Annales de la Société Scientifique de Bruxelles A47 (1927) 49–59.
  • A. Friedmann, "Über die Krümmung des Raumes", Zeitschrift für Physik 10 (1922) 377–386, https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01332580.
9 thms3 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 4 of 13Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me